Barco Projector Led Pro Users Manual B
26-0501000-00 to the manual 57f6f336-2a77-4257-946b-11bc8feb30c6
2015-02-02
: Barco Barco-Barco-Projector-Led-Pro-Users-Manual-419544 barco-barco-projector-led-pro-users-manual-419544 barco pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 186 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉ
ibaJmol
•Manual # 26-0501000-00
•Revision B
qj
ii LED-PRO • User’s Guide
ibaJmol==rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉ
`çéóêáÖÜí
© Barco, Inc. May 1, 2006
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It
shall not otherwise be recorded, transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior
written consent of Barco.
kçíáÅÉ
Barco provides this manual “as is” without warranty of any kind, either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for
a particular purpose. Barco may make improvements and/or changes to the product(s) and/
or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information in this publication; these changes are incorporated in
new editions of this publication.
cÉÇÉê~ä=`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=`çããáëëáçå=Ec``F=pí~íÉãÉåí
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be responsible for
correcting any interference.
dì~ê~åíÉÉ=~åÇ=`çãéÉåë~íáçå
Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally
stipulated terms of guarantee. On receipt, the purchaser must immediately inspect all
delivered goods for damage incurred during transport, as well as for material and
manufacturing faults Barco must be informed immediately in writing of any complaints.
The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks, in the case of special
systems and software on the date of commissioning, at latest 30 days after the transfer of
risks. In the event of justified notice of compliant, Barco can repair the fault or provide a
replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate period. If this measure proves to be
impossible or unsuccessful, the purchaser can demand a reduction in the purchase price or
cancellation of the contract. All other claims, in particular those relating to compensation for
direct or indirect damage, and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well
as to other services provided by Barco, being a component of the system or independent
service, will be deemed invalid provided the damage is not proven to be attributed to the
absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the intent or gross negligence or part
of Barco.
If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on goods delivered by
Barco, or if the goods are handled incorrectly, in particular if the systems are commissioned
operated incorrectly or if, after the transfer of risks, the goods are subject to influences not
LED-PRO • User’s Guide iii
agreed upon in the contract, all guarantee claims of the purchaser will be rendered invalid.
Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attributed to
programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser, e.g. interfaces. Normal
wear as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco
either.
The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations
specified in this manual must be complied with by the customer.
qê~ÇÉã~êâë
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered
trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders. All brand and product names
mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as
advertising for the products or their manufactures.
`çãé~åó=^ÇÇêÉëë
Barco Media and Entertainment
11101 Trade Center Drive
Rancho Cordova, California 95670
USA
•Phone: (916) 859-2500
•Fax: (916) 859-2515
•Websites:
~www.folsom.com
~www.events.barco.com
Barco N.V.
Noordlaan 5
8520 Kuurne
BELGIUM
•Phone: +32 56.36.82.11
•Fax: +32 56.35.16.51
•Website: www.barco.com
iv LED-PRO • User’s Guide
léÉê~íçêë=p~ÑÉíó=pìãã~êó
The general safety information in this summary is for operating personnel.
aç=kçí=oÉãçîÉ=`çîÉêë=çê=m~åÉäë
There are no user-serviceable parts within the unit. Removal of the top cover will expose
dangerous voltages. To avoid personal injury, do not remove the top cover. Do not operate
the unit without the cover installed.
mçïÉê=pçìêÅÉ
This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 230
volts rms between the supply conductors or between both supply conductor and ground. A
protective ground connection by way of grounding conductor in the power cord is essential
for safe operation.
dêçìåÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=mêçÇìÅí
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid
electrical shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to
the product input or output terminals. A protective-ground connection by way of the
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=mçïÉê=`çêÇ
Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product. Use only a power cord
that is in good condition. Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=cìëÉ
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse having identical type, voltage rating, and current
rating characteristics. Refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel.
aç=kçí=léÉê~íÉ=áå=bñéäçëáîÉ=^íãçëéÜÉêÉë
To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide v
qÉêãë=få=qÜáë=j~åì~ä=~åÇ=bèìáéãÉåí=j~êâáåÖ=
t^okfkd
Highlights an operating procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., which, if not strictly
observed, could result in injury to or death of personnel.
`^rqflk
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
^sboqfppbjbkq>
Le point d´exclamation dans un triangle equilatéral signale à alerter l´utilisateur qu´il y a
des instructions d´operation et d´entretien tres importantes dans la litérature qui
accompagne l´appareil.
slopf`eq
Ein Ausrufungszeichen innerhalb eines gleichwinkeligen Dreiecks dient dazu, den
Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs-und Wartungsanweisungen in der Dem Great
beiliegenden Literatur aufmerksam zu machen.
Note Highlights an essential operating procedure, condition or
statement.
vi LED-PRO • User’s Guide
`Ü~åÖÉ=eáëíçêó
The table below lists the changes to the LED-PRO User’s Guide.
Table 0-1. Change History
Rev Date ECO # Description Approved By
A 8/1/05 1478 Release Jim Wickenhiser
B 5/1/06 1620 Change summary:
•Added new features including Setup Wizard, Input
Wizard, diagonal test pattern scrolling and 50/60Hz
refresh rate selection.
•Restructured system menus by adding LED Menu,
Source Alignment Menu and Expert Mode Menu.
•Revised document template.
In Chapter 1, refer to the “What’s New in Firmware Version
2.0” section on page 5 for full details on all new features.
Jim Wickenhiser
LED-PRO • User’s Guide vii
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë
`Ü~éíÉê=N fåíêçÇìÅíáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K= N
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
How to Use This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About the LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
What’s New in Firmware Version 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Connectivity Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Application Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
`Ü~éíÉê=O e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K= V
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LED-PRO Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Display Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Menu Keys Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inputs Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About the LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LED-PRO Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
`Ü~éíÉê=P fåëí~ää~íáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=NT
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cable and Adapter Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Rack-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Power Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Power Cord/Line Voltage Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Signal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Format Connection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
`Ü~éíÉê=Q léÉê~íáçåK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=OR
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power-Up Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Standard Bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bootup in Ethernet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
viii LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Bootup with a Stored LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Quick Setup and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Quick Function Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Status Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Status Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setup Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setup Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Input Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Source Alignment — Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Red Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Red Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Grn Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Grn Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Blue Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Blue Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Clip to SubBlk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Luma Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Source Alignment — SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Clip to SubBlk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Luma Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Source Alignment — DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Programming EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the Input Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the Expert Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Expert Mode Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Expert Mode Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LED-PRO • User’s Guide ix
Table of Contents
Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Timing Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Colorspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Source Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Custom In Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Letterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Save Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Reset Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recall Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Delete Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Unsaved Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Timing Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Refresh Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
LED Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LED Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LED Gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LED Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Lock to Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Minimum Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Save Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Reset Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Trans With. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Trans Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Capture Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Delete Logo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Logo Present. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
In Auto Acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
VFD Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Diagnostic RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
EDID DVI In Frmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lock Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Unsaved Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using the Test Pattern Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Test Pattern Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Test Pattern Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Raster Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Diagonal Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using the Pan & Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pan & Zoom Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
xLED-PRO • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Pan & Zoom Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pan H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pan V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Save Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Recall Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Using the LED Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LED Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LED Menu Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LED Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LED Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LED Gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LED Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LED Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tile Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LED-PRO ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LED Wall ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fiber Tx ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fiber Rx ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
LED Test Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
LED OSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Boost Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Creative Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tile Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Save Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Reset Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Using the Input Position Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Input Position Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Input Position Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
H Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
H Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
V Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
V Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Save Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reset Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Recall Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
`Ü~éíÉê=R réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNNN
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Software Upgrade Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Hardware Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Via FTP Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Via Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LED-PRO • User’s Guide xi
Table of Contents
Serial Upgrade Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
^ééÉåÇáñ=^= péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNNT
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
User Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Physical and Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Agency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Analog 15-pin D Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
DVI-I Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Serial and Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
^ééÉåÇáñ=_= oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçäK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNOR
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Default Serial Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagnostics Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Default IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
RS-232 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
LED-PRO Remote Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Resolution Remote Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Input Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Output Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Custom Format Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
System and Ethernet Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Logo Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Effects Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Pan/Zoom/View Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
LED-PRO Serial Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RESI nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ACQ mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
DINT in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PCOMP in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
FREEZ mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IAR in n cn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IAUTOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IBRT in nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ICNT in nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ICPHO in nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ICLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ICDEL filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ICREC in filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ICRST in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ICSAV in filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
xii LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
ICSP in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ICUSE in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IEDGE in edge nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IGM in n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IHATV nnnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
IHPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
IHTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
IHUE in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ILB in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IRBRT in c nn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IRCNT in c nnn.n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ISAT in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ISMP in n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ISYNC in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ISYNCSLICE in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ITYPE in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
IVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IVPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IVTOTAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IVREC in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IVSAV in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
LCK? in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
RTE in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ICLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ILUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ISHRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
LCKMODE mode type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
LCKPHASE h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
OCNT nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
OCRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
OCSAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
OGM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
OHATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
OHPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
OHSYNC nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
OHTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
OTPM type raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
OVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
OVPOS nnnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
OVSYNC nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
OVTOTAL nnnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
EFLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EFRES nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EFINT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EFHTOTAL nnnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EFHATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
EFHFP nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
EFHSYNC nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
EFHRATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
EFVTOTAL nnnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
EFVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
LED-PRO • User’s Guide xiii
Table of Contents
EFVFP nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
EFVSYNC nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
EFVRATE nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
EFSAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
EFDEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
DMSG mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ENETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
EDHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
EECHO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
EIP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz. . . . . 154
EMAC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
SBAUD n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SYSAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
HELP [op] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
LOADR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
WALLSTANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
MINMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MINSTAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LOCKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LOGOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LOGOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LOGOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LOGOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TRN type n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PANH nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PANV nnn.n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
VIEW? nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
VIEWD nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VIEWR nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VIEWS nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VIEWI? in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VIEWIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VIEWIS in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ZOOM nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
^ééÉåÇáñ=`= `çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNSN
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Return Material Authorization (RMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
fåÇÉñ =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNSP
xiv LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 1
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter is designed to introduce you to the LED-PRO™ User’s Guide. Areas to be
covered are:
•Chapter Structure
•How to Use This Guide
•Conventions
•About the LED-PRO
•Features
•What’s New in Firmware Version 2.0
•Connectivity Diagram
•Application Questions
2LED-PRO • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Chapter Structure
`Ü~éíÉê=píêìÅíìêÉ
The following chapters provide instructions for all aspects of LED-PRO operations:
•Chapter 1, “Introduction” provides a system overview, a list of features, and a
system connectivity diagram.
•Chapter 2, “Hardware Orientation” on page 9 provides detailed diagrams of the
system’s front and rear panels.
•Chapter 3, “Installation” on page 17 provides comprehensive system installation
instructions.
•Chapter 4, “Operation” on page 25 provides menu tress, plus comprehensive
system operating instructions.
•Chapter 5, “Upgrading Software” on page 111 outlines procedures for upgrading
system software components.
•Appendix A, “Specifications” on page 117 lists the LED-PRO’s specifications.
•Appendix B, “Remote Control Protocol” on page 125 provides detailed
information regarding external remote control protocol.
•Appendix C, “Contact Information” on page 161 lists important Barco contact,
RMA, warranty and technical support details.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 3
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
How to Use This Guide
eçï=íç=rëÉ=qÜáë=dìáÇÉ
Following are important tips for streamlining your use of this User’s Guide in its electronic
“PDF” form.
k~îáÖ~íáåÖ
Use Acrobat Reader’s “bookmarks” to navigate to the desired location. All chapter files
have the same bookmark structure for instant navigation to any section. Please note:
•Extensive hyperlinks are provided within the chapters.
•Use Acrobat’s “Go to Previous View” and “Return to Next View” buttons to trace
your complete navigational path.
•Use the “Previous Page” and “Next Page” buttons to go to the previous or next
page within a file.
•Use Acrobat’s extensive search capabilities, such as the “Find” tool and “Search
Index” tool to perform comprehensive searches as required.
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë=~åÇ=fåÇÉñ
Use the Table of Contents bookmarks to navigate a desired topic. Click any item to
instantly jump to that section of the guide. You can also use the Index to jump to specific
topics within a chapter. Each page number in the Index is a hyperlink.
`çåîÉåíáçåë=
The following conventions are used throughout this guide:
•The symbol denotes an operations procedure.
•The symbol S denotes an example.
•Entries written in bold-face capital letters denote physical buttons or chassis
connectors.
SPress TEST PAT to ...
•The term “select” is used as an abbreviation for “scroll to a selected menu line
and press the SEL button.”
•A sequence of menu steps is represented by the menu names, separated by
arrows (>).
SSETUP > Expert Mode > System
... indicates the following sequence:
a. Press SETUP to display the Setup Menu.
b. Scroll to the Expert Mode line and press SEL to display the Expert
Mode Menu.
c. Scroll to the System line and press SEL to display the System Menu.
4LED-PRO • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
About the LED-PRO
^Äçìí=íÜÉ=ibaJmol
The LED-PRO is a powerful all-in-one signal processor that accepts a wide range of video
input signals, and processes them to drive Barco LED displays. The LED-PRO allows you
to scale visual sources and mix them in multiple ways while still maintaining superb picture
quality.
LED-PRO is the ideal solution for converting RGB, HDTV, component, S-video, composite
(NTSC, PAL and SECAM), SDI, DVI, and HDSDI for use with Barco LED walls.
LED-PRO has an advanced feature set that includes universal inputs, aspect ratio
conversion, memory presets, test patterns, source lock, picture adjustments, motion
adaptive de-interlacing, and 3:2 and 2:2 pulldown detection. Refer to the “Features”
section on page 4 for full details.
Please note:
•To ensure trouble-free operation, please follow all procedures in the Installation
and Operation sections of this manual. Refer to Chapter 3, “Installation” on
page 17 and Chapter 4, “Operation” on page 25 for details.
•Should you have any questions regarding the installation or operation of the LED-
PRO=system, please consult with the factory. Refer to Appendix C, “Contact
Information” on page 161 for information.
cÉ~íìêÉë
The LED-PRO utilizes the proprietary Athena scaler, for high performance image
processing. The following features are provided:
•Three universal inputs accept:
~RGBHV/RGBS/RGsB computer video
~Component video (STD or HDTV)
~S-Video
~Composite video with loop-through
•SD SDI/HD SDI input.
•DVI-I connectors support both universal analog and DVI input with loop-through.
•DVI output connector for Barco LED Display interface.
•Input video detection and auto-acquisition. LED-PRO will auto detect and match
input video to stored formats or user configurations.
•Aspect ratio conversion and adjustments.
•Freeze, pan and zoom.
•10-Bit processing, plus motion adaptive and field-to-frame de-interlacing modes.
•3:2 pulldown detection for NTSC, 2:2 film detection for PAL video sources
•Decodes NTSC, PAL, and SECAM.
•Ethernet connector for remote control.
•Vertical lock (lock to source) eliminates image tears and other artifacts in scaled
motion video by eliminating frame rate conversion.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 5
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Features
•60 independent input configuration memory presets.
•Low video delay (3 input fields max., 20 lines min.)
•Logo image capture and recall.
•Dissolve to/from stored logo.
tÜ~íÛë=kÉï=áå=cáêãï~êÉ=sÉêëáçå=OKM
This section lists the new features that have been implemented since the last revision of
the LED-PRO User’s Guide. Reference links are provided for additional details.
•Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard allows users to set up and configure a basic LED display
without the need of the Director Toolset. The Wizard automatically guides the
user through the entire setup process, including:
~Wall detection (tile resolution)
~Addressing and positioning tiles
~Aligning LED-PRO’s output resolution to match the wall
~Wall contrast and gamma adjustment
Please note the following important points:
~The Wizard can only be used with standard LED Tiles. MiPIX,
MiSPHERE and creative OLite displays require the Director Toolset.
~The Director Toolset is still required for wall color calibration, tile firmware
updates, and for creating and applying custom gamma curves.
In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Setup Wizard” section on page 56 for
details.
•Input Wizard
The Input Wizard allows users to easily setup and configure input sources. It
automatically detects and re-scales the selected input source to match the
physical size of the LED display. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Input
Wizard” section on page 62 for details.
•Input Source Alignment
This new menu enables you to adjust the input sources as well as the typical LED
related adjustments, such as Clip to Sub-black and Luma Tracking. In
Chapter 4, refer to the “Source Alignment — Analog” section on page 43 for
details. Additional sections are provided for SDI and DVI sources.
•Expert Mode
This mode gives experienced LED-PRO users the ability to perform more in-depth
alignments. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Expert Mode Menu” section on
page 66 for details.
•50/60 Hz
This new function enables you to select either a 50Hz (PAL) or 60Hz (NTSC/PC)
refresh rate. The selection can be made in both the Expert mode and while using
the Wizard. The tile timings will also be adapted automatically when using the
Wizard. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Setup Wizard” section on page 56
for details.
6LED-PRO • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Features
•Test Pattern — Diagonal Scrolling Mode
This new feature enables users to enable “diagonal scrolling” of any selected test
pattern. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Test Pattern Menu” section on
page 93 for details.
•LED Menu
This improved menu provides access to many LED-related features:
~LED Status (ON/OFF)
~LED contrast and gamma
~LED information (type, size)
~LED internal test patterns (turn on/off, select primary colors)
~LED OSD (full OSD access)
~Boost and Creative modes (OLite only)
~Tile mode (virtual — real mode selection)
In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the LED Menu” section on page 98 for details.
•Director Toolset Patch
~Customers using LED-PRO with the Director Toolset version 1.04 do not
require any software patches.
~Customers that downloaded Director Toolset version 1.03 must
download a new patch (version 1.03.01) to ensure proper LED-PRO
operation. The patch is located on the Barco website, at the following
location:
Link:Director Toolset Patch
Scroll down to the LED-PRO section and follow the directions to install
the patch.
Important Please note the following important points regarding the
Director Toolset:
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 7
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Connectivity Diagram
`çååÉÅíáîáíó=aá~Öê~ã
The figure below provides a sample connectivity diagram:
Figure 1-1. LED-PRO System Diagram (sample)
Please note the following points regarding the diagram:
•The maximum of four inputs are shown, one each in RGB, DVI, Composite and
HD-SDI formats.
•Two different paths from LED-PRO to the LED wall are shown:
~Via DVI, direct between the LED-PRO and the wall.
~Via DVI and fiber optics, via the optional Barco Fiberlink Transmitter and
Receiver.
~An optional Barco AEC (Ambient Environment Controller) is shown.
~The (customer supplied) laptop PC is required for LED wall calibration,
via Director Toolset.
Laptop PC (Director Toolset)
LED-PRO
LED Wall
(Optional)
Fiberlink Transmitter
(Optional)
Fiberlink Receiver
(Optional) AEC
PC (DVI)
Camera (Composite)
DVR (SDI)
PC (RGB)
Ethernet or
RS-232
Fiber Optics
DVI (Direct)
Up to 4 Inputs
Note Contact your Barco sales representative for information on
Fiberlink and AEC systems. These products are not
discussed in this user’s guide.
8LED-PRO • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Application Questions
^ééäáÅ~íáçå=nìÉëíáçåë
At Barco, we take pride in offering unique solutions to demanding technical problems. If
you have application questions, require further information or would like to discuss your
application requirements in more detail, please call (916) 859-2500. Our Customer
Support Engineers will be happy to supply you with the support you need. Refer to
Appendix C, “Contact Information” on page 161 for details.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 9
OK==e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides detailed diagrams of the system’s front and rear panels. The
following topics are discussed:
•LED-PRO Front Panel
•LED-PRO Rear Panel
10 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Front Panel
ibaJmol=cêçåí=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the LED-PRO front panel:
Figure 2-1. LED-PRO Front Panel
Following are descriptions of each front panel section:
1) Display Section
The Display Section includes the display, the ADJUST knob and two “menu
navigation” buttons. Refer to the “Display Section” heading on page 11 for
complete details.
2) Menu Keys Section
The Menu Keys Section includes five buttons that take you directly to the top
level of various system menus. Refer to the “Menu Keys Section” heading on
page 12 for details.
3) Inputs Section
The Inputs Section includes four buttons for selecting various system inputs, plus
the LOGO button that enables you to access a stored image. Refer to the “Inputs
Section” heading on page 13 for details.
Visibly yours
SEL
ESC
SETUP
PAN &
ZOOM
TEST
PAT
LED
INPUT
POS 123SD/HD
SDI LOGO
ADJUST
MENU KEYS
INPUTS
TM
LED-PRO
IN:
OUT:
1024x768@59.94
Freerun
Wall: Enabled
21 3
1) Display Section 3) Inputs Section
2) Menu Keys Section
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 11
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Front Panel
aáëéä~ó=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Display Section:
Figure 2-2. Display Section
Descriptions of each button and control are provided below:
•The Menu Display is a 4 line x 20 character Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
that shows all LED-PRO menus and sub-menus. Brightness is adjustable.
Figure 2-3. Sample Menu Display (Setup Menu)
Please note:
~The top line names the current menu, in all capital letters.
~The navigation cursor (>) in the left-hand column indicates the current
line on which action can be taken.
~The double arrow (>>) indicates that a sub-menu is available.
In Chapter 4, refer to the “Menu Tree” section on page 30 for complete menu
structure details.
•ADJUST — use the Adjust Knob to scroll through all system menus.
~Turn the knob counter-clockwise (CCW) to scroll down.
~Turn the knob clockwise (CW) to scroll up.
•SEL — press to enter a sub-menu, to change a parameter, to accept a parameter,
or to answer “Yes” to certain menu queries.
•ESC — press to exit a menu without making changes, to cancel an operation, or
to answer “No” to certain menu queries. Each press takes you back up the menu
tree by one level.
SETUP
>Setup Wizard >>
Input Wizard >>
Source Alignment >>
SEL
ESC
ADJUST
IN:
OUT:
1024x768@59.94
Freerun
Wall: Enabled
SEL
ESC
12 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Front Panel
jÉåì=hÉóë=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Menu Keys Section:
Figure 2-4. Menu Keys Section
Descriptions of each button and control are provided below:
•SETUP — press to access the top level of the Setup Menu, which enables you to
perform complete system setup procedures. The button lights to indicated that
the menu is active. Toggle the button off to access the Status Menu. In
Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Setup Menu” section on page 39 for menu
details.
•TEST PAT — press to access the top level of the Test Pattern Menu, which
enables you to select system test patterns and the raster box. The button lights to
indicated that the menu is active, or that a test pattern is enabled. Toggle the
button off to access the Status Menu. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Test
Pattern Menu” section on page 93 for menu details.
•PAN & ZOOM — press to access the top level of the Pan & Zoom Menu, which
enables you to pan and zoom the selected source. The button lights to indicated
that the menu is active. Toggle the button off to access the Status Menu. In
Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the Pan & Zoom Menu” section on page 95 for
menu details.
•LED — press to access the top level of the LED Menu, which enables you to
perform various LED-specific functions. The button lights to indicated that the
menu is active. Toggle the button off to access the Status Menu. In Chapter 4,
refer to the “Using the LED Menu” section on page 98 for menu details.
•INPUT POS — press to access the top level of the Input Position Menu, which
enables you to perform “simple” input setup functions within the LED wall window,
such as H and V size and position. (For more comprehensive input setups, use
the Setup Menu.) The button lights to indicated that the menu is active. Toggle
the button off to access the Status Menu. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Using the
Input Position Menu” section on page 105 for menu details.
Please note:
•If you are within a particular menu, but you have not made any changes, pressing
one of the five buttons in the Menu Keys Section takes you directly to the
selected menu.
•If you have made a change within a particular menu and you press one of the five
buttons in the Menu Keys Section, you will be prompted to save your changes.
SETUP
PAN &
ZOOM
TEST
PAT
LED
INPUT
POS
MENU KEYS
SETUP
TEST
PAT
PAN &
ZOOM
LED
INPUT
POS
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 13
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Front Panel
fåéìíë=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Inputs Section:
Figure 2-5. Inputs Section
Descriptions of each button and control are provided below:
•1 — selects universal input 1 (the rear panel DVI connector) as the LED wall’s
source. When pressed, the input is routed to the output using the transition type
specified in the Effects Menu.
•2 — selects universal input 2 (the rear panel HD-15 connector) as the LED wall’s
source. When pressed, the input is routed to the output using the transition type
specified in the Effects Menu.
•3 — selects universal input 3 (the rear panel BNC connectors) as the LED wall’s
source. When pressed, the input is routed to the output using the transition type
specified in the Effects Menu.
•SD/HD SDI — selects the SD/HD input (the rear panel SDI Input BNC connector)
as the LED wall’s source. When pressed, the input is routed to the output using
the transition type specified in the Effects Menu.
•LOGO — selects the LOGO (as stored in flash memory) as the LED wall’s source.
When pressed, the LOGO is routed to the output using the transition type
specified in the Effects Menu. Refer to the “About the LOGO” section on
page 14 for additional details.
123SD/HD
SDI LOGO
INPUTS
1
2
3
SD/HD
SDI
LOGO
14 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Front Panel
^Äçìí=íÜÉ=ildl
The LOGO button can be thought of as an additional input video source which can be
selected and transitioned in the normal manner. The button allows you to capture a still
frame from any input (1,2,3 or SD/HD), and store that image in flash memory. When
selected, the LOGO button lights and the output displays either a stored image (typically a
company logo) or black.
To capture a LOGO (control panel method):
1. Press and hold the desired input button
2. Press LOGO.
The system temporarily freezes the output, captures a frame from the selected
input, and stores the frame in non-volatile memory. A “progress bar” and related
messages will be shown on the display during the capture process.
To capture a LOGO (menu method):
1. Manually freeze the desired image (SETUP > Expert Mode > Freeze > On).
2. Manually capture the logo (SETUP > Expert Mode > Logo > Capture Logo).
Please note the following important points regarding the LOGO:
•The LOGO can be de-selected by pressing one of the other four input sources.
•When LOGO is selected, the PAN & ZOOM button is not operational.
•When no logo is stored internally, the output displays black, and the Status Menu
indicates "Internal Black" as the format.
•When the LOGO is selected and there is a logo stored, the Status Menu indicates
"LOGO" as the input format.
•If a LOGO is stored in flash memory, the image remains through a power cycle.
•The LOGO can be overwritten by capturing a new image.
•If you perform a factory reset, the LOGO is cleared from flash memory.
•You can delete the LOGO manually from flash memory using the Logo Menu. In
Chapter 4, refer to the “Logo” section on page 86 for menu details.
LOGO
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 15
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Rear Panel
ibaJmol=oÉ~ê=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the LED-PRO rear panel:
Figure 2-1. LED-PRO Rear Panel
Following are descriptions of each rear panel connector:
1) Universal Input 1
Two DVI-I connectors are provided for Universal Input 1 — one for the input and
the other for a buffered loop-through. The input corresponds to Button 1 in the
front panel’s Inputs Section.
This input accepts DVI signals, and via a DVI-I to HD-15 adaptor, also accepts
RGB, YUV, S-Video (Y/C), or composite (NTSC, PAL or SECAM) signals.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Input Specifications” section on page 118
for input video details.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I Connector Pinouts” section on
page 122 for pinout specifications.
2) Universal Input 2
Two HD-15 connectors are provided for Universal Input 2 — one for the input
and the other for a buffered loop-through. The input corresponds to Button 2 in
the front panel’s Inputs Section.
This input accepts RGB, YUV, S-Video (Y/C), or composite (NTSC, PAL or
SECAM) signals.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Input Specifications” section on page 118
for input video details.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on
page 121 for pinout specifications.
RS-232
DIAGNOSTICSETHERNET
100-240 V 50-60 Hz
2.3 A
LED INTERFACE
SDI INPUT
UNIVERSAL INPUT 1
IN LOOP
UNIVERSAL INPUT 2
IN LOOP
UNIVERSAL INPUT 3
LOOP
IN
R/R- Y/C
R/R- Y/C
LOOP
IN
G/Y/COMPOSITE
G/Y/COMPOSITE
LOOP
IN
B/B-Y
B/B-Y
LOOP
IN
H/C
H/C
LOOP
IN
V
V
4
1
2
3 5 7
986
1) Universal Input 1 6) Ethernet Port
2) Universal Input 2 7) RS-232 Port
3) Universal Input 3 8) Diagnostics Port
4) SDI Input 9) AC Connector
5) LED Interface
16 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
LED-PRO Rear Panel
3) Universal Input 3
Five BNC connectors are provided for Universal Input 3 — each with a buffered
loop-through. The input corresponds to Button 3 in the Inputs Section, and
accepts RGB, YUV, S-Video (Y/C), or composite (NTSC, PAL or SECAM) signals.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Input Specifications” section on page 118
for input video details.
4) SDI Input
One BNC connector is provided for the SDI Input. The input corresponds to the
SD/HD SDI button in the Inputs Section, and accepts SD-SDI or HD-SDI signals.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Input Specifications” section on page 118
for input video details.
5) LED Interface
One DVI-I connector is provided for the system’s output to an LED wall. The
output is digital only.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “Output Specifications” section on page 119
for output video details.
~In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I Connector Pinouts” section on
page 122 for pinout specifications.
6) Ethernet Port
One RJ-45 connector is provided for 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications with
LED-PRO.
~The port is typically used for diagnostics, or command-line operations via
Teln et.
~Telnet is via port 10001.
Stelnet 192.168.1.100 10001
In Appendix A, refer to the “Ethernet Connector” section on page 123 for
pinouts.
7) RS-232 Port
One 9-pin D connector is provided for RS-232 serial communications with LED-
PRO. The port is typically used for communications with Barco’s Director
Toolset Graphical User Interface (GUI).
In Appendix A, refer to the “Serial and Diagnostic Connector” section on
page 124 for pinouts.
8) Diagnostics Port
One 9-pin D connector is provided for RS-232 serial communications with LED-
PRO. Similar to the Ethernet port, this port is typically used for diagnostics,
uploading code or command-line operations via HyperTerminal or the Flash
Loader.
In Chapter 4, refer to the “Diagnostic RS232” section on page 88 for port setup
operations. In Appendix A, refer to the “Serial and Diagnostic Connector”
section on page 124 for pinouts.
9) AC Connector
One AC Connector is provided for connecting LED-PRO to your facility’s AC
power source. The integral switch turns the chassis on and off.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 17
PK==fåëí~ää~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing the LED-PRO hardware. The
following topics are discussed:
•Safety Precautions
•Unpacking and Inspection
•Site Preparation
•Cable and Adapter Information
•Rack-Mount Installation
•Power Installation
•Signal Installation
•Format Connection Table
18 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
3. Installation
Safety Precautions
p~ÑÉíó=mêÉÅ~ìíáçåë=
For all LED-PRO installation procedures, observe the following important safety and
handling rules to avoid damage to yourself and the equipment:
•To protect users from electric shock, ensure that the power supplies for each unit
connect to earth via the ground wire provided in the AC power Cord.
•The AC Socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and be easily
accessible.
råé~ÅâáåÖ=~åÇ=fåëéÉÅíáçå=
Before opening the LED-PRO box, inspect it for damage. If you find any damage, notify the
shipping carrier immediately for all claims adjustments. As you open the box, compare its
contents against the packing slip. If you find any shortages, contact your Barco sales
representative.
Once you have removed all the components from their packaging and checked that all the
listed components are present, visually inspect each unit to ensure there was no damage
during shipping. If there is damage, notify the shipping carrier immediately for all claims
adjustments.
páíÉ=mêÉé~ê~íáçå=
The environment in which you install your LED-PRO(s) should be clean, properly lit, free
from static, and have adequate power, ventilation, and space for all components.
`~ÄäÉ=~åÇ=^Ç~éíÉê=fåÑçêã~íáçå
The table below provides information regarding supplied cables and adapters:
Table 3-1. LED-PRO System Cables and Adapters
Cable / Adapter Description Quantity
VGA to DVI Adapter DVI to HD-15 adapter for analog inputs 1
RS-232 Cable 15 meter, connects customer supplied laptop to LED-PRO 1
DVI to DVI Cable 5 meter, connects LED-PRO output to LED wall (DVI input) 1
DVI to MDR26 Cable 5 meter, standard, connects LED-PRO output to LED wall (MDR input) 1
DVI to MDR26 Cable 5 meter, waterproof, connects LED-PRO output to LED wall (MDR input) 1
AC Power Cord 7 foot, 10A 1
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 19
3. Installation
Rack-Mount Installation
o~ÅâJjçìåí=fåëí~ää~íáçå
LED-PRO units are designed to be rack mounted and are supplied with front rack-mount
hardware. Please note the following important points:
•Rear rack-mount brackets are available as a kit, and are recommended for use
when units are mounted in transit cases.
•When rack mounting the unit, remember that the maximum ambient operating
temperature for the unit is 40 degrees C.
•Leave sufficient front and rear space to make sure that the airflow through the fan
and vent holes is not restricted.
•When installing equipment into a rack, distribute the units evenly to prevent
hazardous conditions that may be created by uneven weight distribution.
•Connect the unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.
•Reliable grounding (earthing) of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained.
•Rack mount the unit from the front rack ears using four rack screws (not supplied).
Rack threads may be metric or otherwise — depending upon the rack type.
•Install the lower of the two mounting holes first.
mçïÉê=fåëí~ää~íáçå
Use the following steps to install power to the LED-PRO:
1. Connect an AC power cord to the AC Power Connector on the rear of the LED-
PRO, and then to an AC outlet.
2. Connect AC Power cords (or AC adapters) to all peripheral equipment, such as
video sources and PCs. Please note:
~Connect each unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.
~Reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained.
3. Ensure that your LED wall is properly assembled, and that all power cords are
distributed and connected to all tiles — in the proper sequence. Refer to your
specific LED tile’s “User’s Guide” for details.
20 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
3. Installation
Power Installation
mçïÉê=`çêÇLiáåÉ=sçäí~ÖÉ=pÉäÉÅíáçå
LED-PRO is rated to operate with the following supplies:
•Input Power: 100-240 VAC, 47-63 Hz
•Power Consumption: 150 watts maximum
LED-PRO performs line voltage selection automatically, and no user controls are required.
The AC power cords must be accessible so that they can be removed during field servicing.
Figure 3-1. Tandem Prong-type Plug
Warning When the LED-PRO is used in the 230-volt mode, a UL listed
line cord rated for 250 volts at 15 amps must be used and
must conform to IEC-227 and IEC-245 standards. This cord
will be fitted with a tandem prong-type plug.
The rear panel ON/OFF switch does not disconnect the unit
from input AC power. To facilitate disconnection of AC power,
the power cord must be connected to an accessible outlet
near the unit.
Building Branch Circuit Protection: For 115 V use 20 A, for
230 V use 8 A.
Avertissement La choix de la ligne de voltage se réalise automatiquement
par le LED-PRO Transformateur Graphique. On n'a pas
besoin du controller usager pour la choix de la ligne de
voltage.
Warnung Das LED-PRO gerät mu beim Anschlu an 240V ~ mit einer
vom VDE auf 250V/10A geprüften Netzleitung mit einem
Schukostecker ausgestattet sein.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 21
3. Installation
Signal Installation
páÖå~ä=fåëí~ää~íáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample LED-PRO system diagram. Use this figure for
reference during the signal installation process.
Figure 3-2. LED-PRO System Diagram (sample)
Use the following steps to install signals to/from the LED-PRO:
1. Connect outputs from your selected source devices to LED-PRO’s inputs. A
maximum of four devices can be connected.
~In Chapter 2, refer to the “LED-PRO Rear Panel” section on page 15 for
details on all rear panel universal input connectors.
~Refer to the “Format Connection Table” section on page 23 for
connection details using a customer supplied breakout cable.
2. Connect a laptop PC to LED-PRO via either RS-232 or Ethernet.
~Ensure that the Director Toolset is properly installed on the laptop PC.
~Director Toolset is required for LED wall calibration, but it is not required
for initial setup. LED-PRO’s “Setup Wizard” is used for this purpose.
Laptop PC (Director Toolset)
LED-PRO
LED Wall
(Optional)
Fiberlink Transmitter
(Optional)
Fiberlink Receiver
(Optional) AEC
PC (DVI)
Camera (Composite)
DVR (SDI)
PC (RGB)
Ethernet or
RS-232
Fiber Optics
DVI (Direct)
Up to 4 Inputs
Note All inputs except the SDI Input can be looped.
22 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
3. Installation
Signal Installation
~If you are using RS-232 communications, connect the laptop to LED-
PRO’s RS-232 Port.
~If you are using Ethernet communications, a totally “local” network is
recommended, without IP connections to the outside world:
• Use a crossover Ethernet cable for a direct connection, or
• Use a standard Ethernet cables in conjunction with an Ethernet
hub or switch.
3. Ensure that your LED wall is properly assembled, and that all data cables are
connected to all tiles — in the proper sequence. Refer to your specific LED tile’s
“User’s Guide” for details.
4. Connect LED-PRO’s LED Interface output to the data input of your LED wall.
Please note:
~Use the proper cable, depending upon your LED wall’s input connector
(e.g., DVI or MDR). Refer to the “Cable and Adapter Information” on
page 18 for details on all connection cables.
~(Option) If you are using a fiber optic link:
• Ensure that power is properly connected to all Fiberlink units.
• Connect LED-PRO’s LED Interface output to the input of the
Fiberlink Transmitter.
• Connect a fiber optic cable from the output of the Fiberlink
Transmitter to the input of the Fiberlink Receiver.
• Connect the output of the Fiberlink Receiver to the data input of
your LED wall.
5. (Option) If you are using the Barco AEC:
~Ensure that power is properly connected to the AEC.
~Connect the data output of your LED wall to the input of the AEC.
Please continue with system setup, menu orientation and operations, as outlined in
Chapter 4, “Operation” on page 25.
Note A 15 meter RS-232 cable is provided, which will assist you in
viewing the LED wall while simultaneously using your laptop
for calibration purposes.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 23
3. Installation
Format Connection Table
cçêã~í=`çååÉÅíáçå=q~ÄäÉ
Use the following table to connect various source formats to LED-PRO, using the system’s
universal input connectors in conjunction with a customer supplied VGA to 5 x BNC
breakout cable. Please note:
•RGB format — typical devices: Computers
•S-Video (Y/C) format — typical devices: S-Video DVD or VCR
•YUV or YPbPr (Betacam) format — typical devices: DVD player, Betacam deck
•Composite format — typical devices: NTSC/PAL DVD or VCR
Using a customer supplied VGA to 5 x BNC breakout cable, multiple input combinations
are possible. Cells with checks denote the connections required for the indicated format.
Please contact Barco Technical Support for information on obtaining breakout cables. In
Appendix C, refer to the “Contact Information” section on page 162 for details.
Note For RGB with H and V sync, use the VGA connector directly.
Table 3-2. Analog Input Combinations using Breakout Cable
Breakout Cable
Wire Color
Composite
Video
S-Video
(Y/C)
YUV
(YPbPr)
RGB
Sync on Green
RGB
Comp Sync
RGB
Separate H V
R
3
(Chrom)
3
(Pr)
33 3
G
3 3
(Lum)
3
(Lum)
3 3 3
B
3
(Pb)
3 3 3
H Sync
3 3
V Sync
3
24 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
3. Installation
Format Connection Table
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 25
QK==léÉê~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides comprehensive menu descriptions and detailed operating
instructions for the LED-PRO. The following topics are discussed:
•Control Overview
•Power-Up Initialization
•Quick Setup and Operations
•Menu Tree
•Using the Menu System
•Quick Function Reference
•Using the Status Menu
•Using the Setup Menu
•Using the Setup Wizard
•Using the Input Wizard
•Using the Expert Mode Menu
•Using the Test Pattern Menu
•Using the Pan & Zoom Menu
•Using the LED Menu
•Using the Input Position Menu
26 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Control Overview
`çåíêçä=lîÉêîáÉï
There are several ways to control the LED-PRO:
•The front panel is available for status and control using the display, the ADJUST
knob and the two menu “navigation” buttons (SEL and ESC). In conjunction with
other dedicated buttons, these controls enable you to configure the system, to
adjust all system parameters, and to utilize the “wizards.”
•The unit can be controlled remotely via RS-232 or Ethernet interface. In
Appendix B, refer to the “LED-PRO Remote Commands” section on page 128
for remote control command details.
•The Director Toolset is a software application that is used to detect the LED-
PRO and provide it with information concerning the LED tiles. Operations of the
Director Toolset are not covered in this guide. Please refer to the “Director
Toolset User’s Guide” for more information.
mçïÉêJré=fåáíá~äáò~íáçå
After connecting power to the LED-PRO, locate the power switch on the back of the
chassis, and turn the power ON. The LED button lights, and the display shows a series of
initialization screens. The screens vary depending upon the last state of the system:
•Standard Bootup
•Bootup in Ethernet Mode
•Bootup with a Stored LOGO
pí~åÇ~êÇ=_ççíìé
While the main board is initializing, the following screens are shown on the display
•Initialization Screen 1 displays the “Program Loading” message.
Figure 4-1. Initialization Screen 1
•Initialization Screen 2 displays the “Transferring” message.
Figure 4-2. Initialization Screen 2
Program Loading
Please Wait
Transferring to
main program
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 27
4. Operation
Power-Up Initialization
•Initialization Screen 3 displays the software version that is currently being
loaded. Note that the software version changes as upgrades are released.
Figure 4-3. Initialization Screen 3
At the conclusion of the boot-up procedure, the Input 1 button will light and the Status
Menu is shown:
Figure 4-4. Status Menu (sample)
Refer to the “Using the Status Menu” section on page 36 for complete details.
_ççíìé=áå=bíÜÉêåÉí=jçÇÉ
If Ethernet mode was enabled (on the Ethernet Menu) and saved during your last session,
it will be restored during initialization.
•If DHCP was enabled, LED-PRO will attempt to contact the DHCP server for an IP
address. During this process, the following message is shown:
Figure 4-5. Initialization Screen — Connect to DHCP Server
•If DHCP is off and a static IP address was saved (e.g., any address other than
000.000.000.000), LED-PRO sets the Ethernet port with the selected address.
LED-PRO
Barco Folsom LLC
Version 2.00
Initializing ...
IN:
1024x768@59.94
OUT: Freerun
Wall: Enabled
Note By default, LED-PRO boots up with Input 1 selected from a
“factory reset” operation. However, if you perform the “Save
System State” procedure with a different input selected, the
system will acquire and select that input.
Searching for
DHCP server
Please wait ...
Note It takes approximately 40 seconds for the system to connect
to the DHCP server.
28 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Power-Up Initialization
During this process, the following message is shown:
Figure 4-6. Initialization Screen — Set IP Address
At the conclusion of the boot-up procedure, the Input 1 button will light and the Status
Menu is shown.
_ççíìé=ïáíÜ=~=píçêÉÇ=ildl
During your last session, if a LOGO was stored in non-volatile memory, it will be loaded into
memory during initialization. During the loading process, the following message is shown
along with a progress bar (on the third line):
Figure 4-7. Initialization Screen — Load Logo
At the conclusion of the procedure, the Input 1 button light and the Status Menu is shown.
Setting Ethernet
with static IP addr
Please wait ...
Note It takes approximately 40 seconds for the system to set the IP
address.
Note By default, LED-PRO boots up with Input 1 selected from a
“factory reset” operation. However, if you perform the “Save
System State” procedure with a different input selected, the
system will acquire and select that input.
Loading Logo
Please wait ...
Note By default, LED-PRO boots up with Input 1 selected from a
“factory reset” operation. However, if you perform the “Save
System State” procedure with a different input selected, the
system will acquire and select that input.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 29
4. Operation
Quick Setup and Operations
nìáÅâ=pÉíìé=~åÇ=léÉê~íáçåë
For the optimum speed in system setup and operations, use the following steps.
1. Run the Setup Wizard. Refer to the “Using the Setup Wizard” section on
page 56 for instructions.
2. Run the Input Wizard. Refer to the “Using the Input Wizard” section on
page 62 for instructions.
3. Select your inputs and roll your video.
Please note:
•For advanced system operations and specific “tweaks,” start with the “Quick
Function Reference” section on page 33, and select the function that you wish to
perform.
•For a complete overview of all system operating procedures, start with the “Menu
Tree” section on page 30 and review the entire chapter.
30 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Menu Tree
jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates a simplified view of the LED-PRO Menu Tree. Use this
diagram for reference throughout this chapter. Please note:
•In the diagram, only “top level” menus are shown.
•The symbol >> denotes additional sub-menus.
•In the sections describing each individual tree, expanded menus are provided.
Figure 4-8. LED-PRO Menu Tree
Each menu is explained in the following sections:
•Using the Menu System
•Using the Status Menu
•Using the Setup Menu
•Using the Test Pattern Menu
•Using the Pan & Zoom Menu
•Using the LED Menu
•Using the Input Position Menu
Status
Menu
Setup
Menu
Test Pattern
Menu
Pan & Zoom
Menu
LED
Menu
Input Position
Menu
H Position
H Size
V Position
V Size
Save Cfg >>
Reset Config
Recall Config >>
LED Control
LED Status
LED Contrast
LED Gamma
LED Info >>
LED Test Pat >>
LED OSD >>
Boost Mode
Creative
Tile Mode
RS-232 >>
Save Cfg
Reset Cfg
Pan H
Pan V
Zoom
Save Preset
Recall Preset
Reset
Type
Raster Box
Diagonal
Setup Wizard >>
Source Align >>
Input Wizard >>
Presets >>
RS-232 >>
Expert Mode >>
SETUP PAN &
ZOOM
TEST
PAT LED INPUT
POS
Save State
Factory Rst
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 31
4. Operation
Using the Menu System
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=jÉåì=póëíÉã
This section lists the rules and conventions for using LED-PRO’s menu system. The figure
below illustrates a sample menu:
Figure 4-9. Test Pattern Menu (sample)
Please note the following important rules and conventions:
•Pressing any of the buttons in the Menu Keys Section takes you directly to the
top level of the selected menu.
•The top line names the current menu, in all capital letters.
•Subsequent lines typically display two fields:
~For a listed function, the left-hand field names the function and the right-
hand field is the function’s current parameter or value.
~For a listed sub-menu, the left-hand field names the sub-menu that you
can access, and the right-hand field displays the double arrow (>>),
indicating that a sub-menu is available.
•The “navigation” cursor (>) in the left-hand column indicates the current line on
which action can be taken. This arrow “scrolls” as you rotate the knob.
•Scrolling:
~Turn the ADJUST knob counter-clockwise (CCW) to scroll down.
~Turn the ADJUST knob clockwise (CW) to scroll up.
•To enter a sub-menu, scroll to the desired line and press SEL.
•To change a parameter, scroll to the desired line and press SEL. The cursor
changes to the “edit” cursor (#). Use the ADJUST knob to modify the parameter.
•To accept a parameter or value, press SEL. The edit cursor changes back to the
navigation cursor.
•In the “edit” mode, to exit (or cancel) without changing the original parameter,
press ESC.
TEST PATTERN
Type Burst
>Raster Box Off
Diagonal Motion Off
Note Throughout this chapter, the term “select” is used as an
abbreviation for “scroll to a selected menu line and press the
SEL button.”
SSelect the Raster Box field to ...
Note You must press SEL to activate an LED wall function.
Processor functions generally update as you adjust them.
32 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Menu System
•To navigate back up the menu structure, press ESC. Each press takes you back
up the menu tree by one level.
•The SEL button is also used to answer “Yes” to certain menu queries. The ESC
button is also used to answer “No” to certain menu queries.
Note The display itself is four lines high, and the ADJUST knob is
used to scroll through the various menu lines. Throughout
this chapter, entire menus will be shown for clarity — rather
than a series of four-line sections.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 33
4. Operation
Quick Function Reference
nìáÅâ=cìåÅíáçå=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ
Use the following table to quickly access the proper menu for a specific function. Both
hyperlinks and page numbers are provided.
Table 4-1. LED-PRO Quick Function Reference Table
How to: Use the Following: Page
Adjust 1:1 timing 1:1 Timing Adjust Menu 70
Adjust diagonal motion Diagonal Motion 94
Adjust display brightness VFD Brightness 88
Adjust input position (abbreviated procedure) Using the Input Position Menu 105
Adjust LED wall contrast LED Contrast 82
Adjust LED wall gamma curve LED Gamma 82
Adjust output refresh rate Refresh Rate 81
Adjust output timing parameters Timing Adjust 81
Adjust oversample timing OverSample Timing Adjust Menu 71
Align or adjust a DVI source Source Alignment — DVI 48
Align or adjust an analog source Source Alignment — Analog 43
Align or adjust an SDI source Source Alignment — SDI 46
Capture a LOGO Capture Logo 86
Change LED wall status from Standby to Enabled LED Status 82
Change the input format Input Format 69
Change the sampling mode Sampling 69
Change the transition time (rate) Trans Time 85
Change the transition type Trans With 85
Delete a “global” preset (or “View”) Delete 50
Delete a custom input format Custom In Format 72
Delete a LOGO Delete Logo 86
Delete an input configuration Delete Config 79
Display software version Software Version 92
Enable or disable a test pattern Type 94
Enable or disable an LED test pattern LED Test Pattern 102
Enable or disable auto-acquire In Auto Acquire 87
Enable or disable freeze mode Freeze 87
Enable or disable letterbox Letterbox 76
34 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Quick Function Reference
Enable or disable the LED boost mode Boost Mode 103
Enable or disable the LED creative mode Creative Mode 103
Enable or disable the LED OSD (on screen display) LED OSD 102
Enable or disable the LED tile mode Tile Mode 103
Enable or disable the raster box Raster Box 94
Get information (status) about the current input and output Using the Status Menu 36
Get information on LED wall and fiber communications LED Information 82
Lock or unlock the front panel Lock Front Panel 91
Pan (tilt) image vertically Pan V 96
Pan image horizontally Pan H 96
Program EDID Programming EDID 53
Recall a “global” preset (or "View") Recall 49
Recall a “local” preset from memory Recall Preset 97
Recall an input configuration Recall Config 78
Reset “local” preset settings to default values Reset 97
Reset an input configuration Reset Config 78
Reset output configuration Reset Config 84
Reset to factory default Factory Reset 51
Run the Input Wizard Using the Input Wizard 62
Run the Setup Wizard Using the Setup Wizard 56
Save “local” preset Save Preset 97
Save a “global” preset (or "View") Save 50
Save a custom input format Custom In Format 72
Save all system, input and output settings Save System State 51
Save an input configuration Save Config 107
Save output configuration Save Config 84
Select (configure) a custom input format Custom In Format 72
Select an input signal type Type 72
Select colorspace Colorspace 72
Select sync, de-interlace, pulldown comp and sync slice Processing 77
Set “lock to source” parameters Lock to Source 83
Set Diagnostic Port RS-232 parameters Diagnostic RS232 88
Set Ethernet parameters (mode, DHCP, IP address) Ethernet 89
Table 4-1. LED-PRO Quick Function Reference Table (Continued)
How to: Use the Following: Page
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 35
4. Operation
Quick Function Reference
Set LED wall control to local or remote LED Control 82
Set minimum delay Minimum Delay 83
Set the display mode to crop or scale Display Mode 76
Set the input’s aspect ratio Aspect Ratio 76
Set the RS-232 baud rate RS232 51
Verify if LOGO is present in memory Logo Present 86
Zoom the image in and out Zoom 97
Table 4-1. LED-PRO Quick Function Reference Table (Continued)
How to: Use the Following: Page
36 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Status Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=pí~íìë=jÉåì
The figure below illustrates a sample Status Menu:
Figure 4-10. Status Menu (sample)
The Status Menu is a “standalone” menu without any sub-menus. In addition, the “cursor”
does not appear.
•Status Menu Access
•Status Menu Description
pí~íìë=jÉåì=^ÅÅÉëë==
To access the Status Menu:
•Automatic access after system boot-up.
•Press ESC once for each level that you are down within a menu tree.
SOn the LED Menu, the cursor is on LED Information. Press ESC once to
access the Status Menu. From within the LED Information Menu, press
ESC twice to access the Status Menu.
•Toggle a selected menu button off — from any level down the menu tree.
SYou are several levels down the Setup Menu. Press SETUP to access the
Status Menu directly.
IN:
1024x768@59.94
OUT: Freerun
Wall: Enabled
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 37
4. Operation
Using the Status Menu
pí~íìë=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Status Menu provides information about the currently selected system input (as
determined by the input buttons) and the selected output. If the input is changed, the fields
change accordingly. Other pertinent changes that you make within the menu system are
shown, once you return to the Status Menu.
Figure 4-11. Status Menu Fields
Following are descriptions of each variable field:
•<type>
Specifies the type of input signal being processed. Choices include NTSC/PAL/
SECAM, SDI, HD-SDI, RGB, YPbPr, or DVI.
•<in_format>
Indicates the current input video format in the following form:
Hact x Vact @ Vr Hz
S1280x1024@60
Please note:
~If a “saved” user input configuration is used for the current input (as
saved with the Save Config or Save System State functions), the field
shows the name of the user input configuration — instead of the format.
In this case, to view the format’s parameters, use the Input Menu
(SETUP > Expert Mode > Input).
~If the format itself is displayed, the input has not been saved.
~If the currently selected input does not have a valid input signal, the
message "Invalid Signal" is shown.
•<genl_mode+src>
Indicates the current “Lock to Source” mode and type (if locked), as set on the
Lock to Source Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode > Output > Lock to Source).
Refer to the “Lock to Source” section on page 83 for details.
Choices include:
~Freerun — Not locked, freerun timing
~HV Lock,Input — horizontal and vertical lock to input video
~V Lock,Input — vertical lock to input video
If the unit is set for a particular “Lock to Source” mode and type, but that source is
missing (or lock can not be achieved), the unit periodically attempts to lock. While
IN: <type>
<in_format>
OUT <gen1_mode+src>
<wall status>
38 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Status Menu
lock has not been reestablished, the display changes to "Lost Input," and the
source field remains unchanged.
•<wall status>
Indicates the status of the Barco LED wall that is currently connected to LED-
PRO. Choices include:
~No Wall detected— no Barco LED wall is connected to LED-PRO
~Wall: Enabled — Barco LED wall detected and enabled
~Wall: Standby — Barco LED wall detected and in standby mode
If no wall is detected, ensure that the Barco LED Wall is properly connected to the
LED-PRO connector labeled "LED Interface."
Important When Lock to Source is enabled, LED-PRO does not allow
you to switch input channels. You can only switch to/from the
current input and the Black/Logo channel.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 39
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=pÉíìé=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•Setup Menu Tree
•Setup Menu Description
•Programming EDID
•Using the Setup Wizard
•Using the Input Wizard
•Using the Expert Mode Menu
40 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pÉíìé=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
Press SET UP to access the Setup Menu. The figure below illustrates a simplified menu
tree. The symbol >> denotes additional sub-menus. The menu trees for the Setup
Wizard,Input Wizard and Expert Mode are provided in their respective sections.
Figure 4-12. Setup Menu Tree
Setup
Menu
Setup Wizard
Source Alignment
Setup Wizard >>
Input Wizard
Input Wizard >>
Contrast
Brightness
Red Contrast
Red Bright
Grn Contrast
Grn Bright
Blue Contrast
Blue Bright
Sharpness
Clip SubBlk
Luma Track
EDID DVI
EDID Format
Contrast
Brightness
Hue
Saturation
Sharpness
Clip SubBlk
Luma Track
EDID DVI
EDID Format
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
EDID DVI
EDID Format
Presets
Recall
Save
Delete
RS-232
RS-232
SETUP
Save Sys State
Factory Reset
DVISDIAnalog
Expert Mode
Input >>
Output >>
Effects >>
Logo >>
Auto Acquire
Freeze
System >>
Software Version
Factory Reset
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 41
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pÉíìé=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Setup Menu enables you to set up all LED-PRO input, output and system parameters.
If desired, all setup information can be stored in non-volatile memory (using the “Save
System State” function). Once saved, all settings will be automatically recalled each time
the unit is turned on.
The figure below illustrates the Setup Menu:
Figure 4-13. Setup Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Setup Wizard
•Input Wizard
•Source Alignment — Analog
•Source Alignment — SDI
•Source Alignment — DVI
•Presets
•RS232
•Expert Mode
•Save System State
•Factory Reset
SETUP
>Setup Wizard >>
Input Wizard >>
Source Alignment >>
Presets >>
RS232 >>
Expert Mode >>
Save System State
Factory Reset
Note The Source Alignment Menu changes depending upon the
format of the selected source — analog, SDI or DVI.
42 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pÉíìé=táò~êÇ
From the Setup Menu, select Setup Wizard to display the Setup Wizard Start Menu
which enables you to quickly and conveniently configure an LED wall along with the
system’s output.
Figure 4-14. Setup Wizard Start Menu
Refer to the “Using the Setup Wizard” section on page 56 for full instructions.
fåéìí=táò~êÇ
From the Setup Menu, select Input Wizard to display the Input Wizard Start Menu, which
enables you to quickly and conveniently set up all inputs and position them on the LED
wall. This wizard also enables you to set the wall’s contrast and gamma.
Figure 4-15. Input Wizard Start Menu
Refer to the “Using the Input Wizard” section on page 62 for full instructions.
LED-PRO FULL WIZARD
Connect all power
and video cables.
Press <SEL> to start
LED-PRO INPUT WIZARD
Connect all power
and video cables.
Press <SEL> to start
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 43
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pçìêÅÉ=^äáÖåãÉåí=Ô=^å~äçÖ
From the Setup Menu (for an analog input source), select Source Alignment to display
the Analog Source Alignment Menu. This menu enables you to adjust all aspects of the
source’s “visible” parameters.
Figure 4-16. Analog Source Alignment Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each Analog Source Alignment Menu function:
•Contrast
•Brightness
•Red Contrast
•Red Bright
•Grn Contrast
•Grn Bright
•Blue Contrast
•Blue Bright
•Sharpness
•Clip to SubBlk
•Luma Tracking
•EDID DVI
`çåíê~ëí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Contrast to adjust the overall contrast
of the selected analog input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
SOURCE ALIGNMENT
>Contrast 100.0
Brightness 100.0
Red Contrast +0.0%
Red Bright +0.0%
Grn Contrast +0.0%
Grn Bright +0.0%
Blue Contrast +0.0%
Blue Bright +0.0%
Sharpness +0
Clip to SubBlk +0
Luma Tracking +0
EDID DVI >>
44 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
_êáÖÜíåÉëë
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Brightness to adjust the overall
brightness of the selected analog input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
oÉÇ=`çåíê~ëí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Red Contrast to adjust the contrast of
the selected input’s red channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
oÉÇ=_êáÖÜí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Red Bright to adjust the brightness of
the selected input’s red channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
dêå=`çåíê~ëí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Grn Contrast to adjust the contrast of
the selected input’s green channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
dêå=_êáÖÜí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Grn Bright to adjust the brightness of
the selected input’s green channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
_äìÉ=`çåíê~ëí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Blue Contrast to adjust the contrast of
the selected input’s blue channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
_äìÉ=_êáÖÜí
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Blue Bright to adjust the brightness of
the selected input’s blue channel.
•The adjustment range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
•0.0% is the default setting.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 45
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pÜ~êéåÉëë
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Sharpness to adjust the sharpness of
the selected input. This selection sets the scaler's sharpening (or softening) value.
•The sharpening range extends from -10 (softest) to +10 (sharpest).
•0 is the default setting (which sets the scaler to its optimum sharpness).
`äáé=íç=pìÄ_äâ
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Clip to SubBlk to eliminate low level
noise in black regions of the image.
•The adjustment range is 0 to -15.
•0 is the default setting.
iìã~=qê~ÅâáåÖ
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select Luma Tracking to prevent green haze
from appearing in regions of low light.
•The adjustment range is 0 to -15.
•0 is the default setting.
bafa=asf
From the Analog Source Alignment Menu, select EDID DVI to display the EDID DVI In
Format Menu, which enables you to update LED-PRO's preferred EDID resolution. Refer
to the “Programming EDID” section on page 53 for instructions.
46 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pçìêÅÉ=^äáÖåãÉåí=Ô=paf
From the Setup Menu (for an SD-SDI or HD-SDI input source), select Source Alignment
to display the SDI Source Alignment Menu. This menu enables you to adjust all aspects
of the source’s “visible” parameters.
Figure 4-17. SDI Source Alignment Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each SDI Source Alignment Menu function:
•Contrast
•Brightness
•Hue
•Saturation
•Sharpness
•Clip to SubBlk
•Luma Tracking
•EDID DVI
`çåíê~ëí
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Contrast to adjust the overall contrast of
the selected SDI input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
_êáÖÜíåÉëë
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Brightness to adjust the overall brightness
of the selected SDI input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
eìÉ
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Hue to adjust the hue of the selected input.
Note that Hue is not applicable for YPbPr inputs.
•The adjustment range (in degrees) is -180 to +180.
•0 is the default setting.
SOURCE ALIGNMENT
>Contrast 100.0
Brightness 100.0
Hue +0
Saturation 100
Sharpness +0
Clip to SubBlk +0
Luma Tracking +0
EDID DVI >>
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 47
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
p~íìê~íáçå
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Saturation to adjust the saturation of the
selected input.
•The adjustment range is -75 to +125.
•100 is the default setting.
pÜ~êéåÉëë
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Sharpness to adjust the sharpness of the
selected input. This selection sets the scaler's sharpening (or softening) value.
•The sharpening range extends from -10 (softest) to +10 (sharpest).
•0 is the default setting (which sets the scaler to its optimum sharpness).
`äáé=íç=pìÄ_äâ
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Clip to SubBlk to eliminate low level noise
in black regions of the image.
•The adjustment range is 0 to -15.
•0 is the default setting.
iìã~=qê~ÅâáåÖ
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select Luma Tracking to prevent green haze
from appearing in regions of low light.
•The adjustment range is 0 to -15.
•0 is the default setting.
bafa=asf
From the SDI Source Alignment Menu, select EDID DVI to display the EDID DVI In
Format Menu, which enables you to update LED-PRO's preferred EDID resolution. Refer
to the “Programming EDID” section on page 53 for instructions.
48 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
pçìêÅÉ=^äáÖåãÉåí=Ô=asf
From the Setup Menu (for a DVI input source), select Source Alignment to display the
DVI Source Alignment Menu. This menu enables you to adjust all aspects of the source’s
“visible” parameters.
Figure 4-18. DVI Source Alignment Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each DVI Source Alignment Menu function:
•Contrast
•Brightness
•Sharpness
•EDID DVI
`çåíê~ëí
From the DVI Source Alignment Menu, select Contrast to adjust the overall contrast of
the selected DVI input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
_êáÖÜíåÉëë
From the DVI Source Alignment Menu, select Brightness to adjust the overall brightness
of the selected SDI input.
•The adjustment range is 75.0% to 125.0%.
•100% is the default setting.
pÜ~êéåÉëë
From the DVI Source Alignment Menu, select Sharpness to adjust the sharpness of the
selected input. This selection sets the scaler's sharpening (or softening) value.
•The sharpening range extends from -10 (softest) to +10 (sharpest).
•0 is the default setting (which sets the scaler to its optimum sharpness).
bafa=asf
From the DVI Source Alignment Menu, select EDID DVI to display the EDID DVI In
Format Menu, which enables you to update LED-PRO's preferred EDID resolution. Refer
to the “Programming EDID” section on page 53 for instructions.
SOURCE ALIGNMENT
>Contrast 100.0
Brightness 100.0
Sharpness +0
EDID DVI >>
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 49
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
mêÉëÉíë
From the Setup Menu, select Presets to display the Global Preset Menu, which enables
you to store, recall or delete up to 16 Presets (or "Views"). Each Preset is essentially a
“global” combination of pan and zoom settings which can be applied to any input. Whereas
the Presets in the Pan & Zoom Menu are input specific, “global” Presets in the Setup
Menu are independent of any specific input.
SYou can define a global Preset that maps the entire input image to the upper
left quarter of the output image.
Please note:
•A global Preset is defined by first creating the desired image settings in the Pan &
Zoom Menu.
•Once created, the settings may be saved (and named) in the Global Preset
Menu under the Setup Menu heading. (Presets cannot be named in the Pan &
Zoom Menu.)
•A stored global Preset can be recalled and applied to the currently selected input.
The figure below illustrates the Global Preset Menu:
Figure 4-19. Global Preset Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Recall
•Save
•Delete
oÉÅ~ää
From the Global Preset Menu, select Recall to display the Recall Preset Menu, which
enables you to choose a stored Preset and assign it to the currently selected input.
Figure 4-20. Recall Preset Menu
To recall a global preset:
1. On the Preset line, press SEL. The navigation cursor (>) changes to the edit
cursor (#).
2. Choose a Preset by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL. Note that
15 Presets are listed, along with the “Default” preset which contains default pan
(0%) and zoom (100%) settings.
PRESET
>Recall >>
Save >>
Delete >>
RECALL PRESET
>Preset Default
Recall
50 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
3. Scroll to the Recall line and press SEL. The global Preset is recalled and applied
to the selected input.
p~îÉ
From the Global Preset Menu, select Save to display the Save Preset Menu, which
enables you to save the current pan and zoom settings using one of 15 predefined names
(Preset 1 through Preset 15).
Figure 4-21. Save Preset Menu
To save a global preset:
1. On the Preset line, press SEL.
2. Choose the desired Preset file by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing
SEL. All 15 global Presets are listed.
3. Scroll to the Save line and press SEL.
~If the Preset file is empty, the message “Preset Saved” appears to
confirm the procedure.
~If the file is already in use, a confirmation menu appears:
• Press SEL to overwrite the Preset.
• Press ESC to return to the Save Preset Menu, enabling you to
change the filename.
aÉäÉíÉ
From the Global Preset Menu, select Delete to display the Delete Preset Menu, which
enables you to delete the contents of a selected Preset.
Figure 4-22. Delete Preset Menu
To delete a global preset:
1. On the Preset line, press SEL.
2. Choose the desired file by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
3. Scroll to the Delete line and press SEL to display a confirmation menu.
~Press SEL to delete the Preset.
~Press ESC to return to the Delete Preset Menu, enabling you to select a
different file to delete.
SAVE PRESET
>Preset Preset 4
Save
DELETE PRESET
>Preset Preset 4
Delete
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 51
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
opOPO
From the Setup Menu, select RS232 to display the RS232 Menu, which enables you to set
the baud rate for the rear panel RS-232 connector.
Figure 4-23. RS232 Menu (sample)
To set the RS-232 connector’s baud rate:
1. On the Baud line, press SEL. The navigation cursor (>) changes to the edit
cursor (#).
2. Choose the desired baud rate with the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
Choices include 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200. Note that the selected Baud
rate is not updated until the SEL button is pressed.
bñéÉêí=jçÇÉ
From the Setup Menu, select Expert Mode to display the Expert Mode Menu, which
provides extensive “advanced” system setup functions. Refer to the “Using the Expert
Mode Menu” section on page 66 for full instructions.
p~îÉ=póëíÉã=pí~íÉ
From the Setup Menu, select Save System State to perform the following functions:
•Save all input, output and system settings in non-volatile memory — so they can
be restored at power up.
•Save a specific input so that it will be acquired and selected at power up. By
default, input 1 is selected at bootup and after a factory reset.
RS232
>Baud 19200
Note Most operations will be performed at 19200.
Note If LED-PRO is placed in Remote mode and Director Toolset
is connected, the Director Toolset may update the RS232
Menu with a different setting, such as 115200.
Note When the Status Menu is next selected, the message “Last
Saved [1, 2, 3 or 4]” appears on line 2, depending upon which
input is selected.
Note If you do not perform the “Save System State” function,
some system information may not be restored upon the next
system power up.
52 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
To save the system state:
1. Select the input button (in the front panel Inputs Section) that you want to be
acquired and selected at power-up.
2. Press SETUP to display the Setup Menu.
3. Select the Save System State line and press SEL. The “Saving System State”
message appears, confirming the process.
c~Åíçêó=oÉëÉí
From the Setup Menu, select Factory Reset to display the Factory Reset Menu, which
enables you to reset LED-PRO to its "factory default" condition.
Figure 4-24. Factory Reset Menu
Note that this procedure deletes all saved user information, input configurations, output
configuration, custom formats, presets and the LOGO (if stored in flash memory).
To perform a factory reset:
1. Select the Factory Reset line and press SEL.
~Press SEL to perform a factory reset. A confirmation menu is shown,
and the system is rebooted.
~Press ESC to return safely to the previous menu.
Note This procedure is identical to the Save System State
procedure located in the System Menu (SETUP > Expert
Mode > System).
Clear all configs,
formats, presets?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
Note This procedure is identical to the Factory Reset procedure
located in the Expert Mode Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode).
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 53
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
mêçÖê~ããáåÖ=bafa
The EDID DVI Input Format Menu enables you to update LED-PRO's preferred EDID
resolution. The menu can be accessed from several points within the menu tree, but all
programming procedures are identical.
EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) is a VESA standard data format that contains
information about a display device and its capabilities, including the preferred (and the
allowed) resolutions of the device.
Please note:
•LED-PRO’s EDID file is stored in non-volatile memory.
•The EDID file is read by a computer's DVI graphic card when its DVI output is
connected to LED-PRO's channel 1 DVI-I input connector during boot-up.
•LED-PRO must be powered on first for the EDID information to be read.
Use the following steps to program EDID:
1. Ensure that there are no cables connected to LED-PRO's DVI-I input and loop
through connectors.
2. From the Source Alignment Menu, select EDID DVI to display the EDID DVI In
Format Menu, a sample of which is shown below. Line 2 (the “Format” line)
displays LED-PRO’s current EDID resolution:
Figure 4-25. EDID DVI In Format Menu (sample)
3. Scroll to the Format line and press SEL.
4. Rotate the ADJUST knob and select the preferred resolution. Press SEL to
“accept” the selection.
Important This menu is designed for advanced users only. Do not
reprogram the EDID unless it is necessary.
Important If a DVI input is connected to LED-PRO, it will interfere with
the programming operation, and cause it to fail. If a Flat
Panel monitor is connected on the loop through, it's own
EDID information will also be changed.
EDID DVI IN FORMAT
>1280x1024 @60
Program EDID
54 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
5. Scroll to the Program EDID line and press SEL. The following warning message
is shown:
Figure 4-26. EDID Warning Message
~Press SEL to proceed with the non-volatile memory programming.
~Press ESC key to cancel the operation.
As an additional precaution, LED-PRO verifies that no cables are connected to
the DVI-I input and loop through connectors. If a DVI source or display device is
detected, the following message appears:
Figure 4-27. EDID DVI Input Detection Error Message
~Disconnect all cables from the DVI input connectors, then press ESC to
continue with programming.
Once the system detects that no DVI source or display is connected, LED-PRO
proceeds with programming. The following message is shown:
Figure 4-28. EDID Programming Message
~If programming is successful, please continue with step 6.
~If programming fails, the following message is shown:
Figure 4-29. EDID Programming Failed Message
WARNING! MAKE SURE
DVI IN & LOOP THRU
ARE NOT CONNECTED
SEL=Cont, ESC=Abort
ERROR! DVI INPUT AND
LOOP THRU CONNS MUST
BE DISCONNECTED!
<ESC> = Continue
Programming EDID
Please wait ...
EDID Prog Failed!
Disconnect DVI in
& loop thru conns
<ESC> = Continue
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 55
4. Operation
Using the Setup Menu
If this error message persists and there is no DVI source or display device
connected to LED-PRO, please contact Barco customer service. In Appendix C,
refer to the “Contact Information” section on page 162 for details.
6. If programming is successful, the following message is shown:
Figure 4-30. EDID Programming Successful Message
Press ESC to return to the EDID DVI In Format Menu.
7. Reconnect the DVI cable from your computer to LED-PRO.
8. Reboot the computer in order for the new EDID information to be read, and for the
new preferred resolution to become available.
EDID Prog Done
Connect DVI input
and reboot the PC
<ESC> = Continue
56 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=pÉíìé=táò~êÇ
The Setup Wizard allows users to quickly set up and align a basic LED display — without
the need of the Director Toolset. The Wizard automatically guides the user through the
entire setup process, including:
•Wall detection (type and size)
•Addressing and positioning tiles
•Aligning LED-PRO’s output resolution to match the wall
•Wall contrast and gamma adjustment
Please note the following important points:
•The Wizard can only be used with standard LED Tiles. MiPIX, MiSPHERE and
creative OLite displays require the Director Toolset.
•The Director Toolset is still required for wall color calibration, tile firmware
updates, and for creating and applying custom gamma curves.
Use the following steps to run the Setup Wizard:
1. Please note the following important Setup Wizard prerequisites:
~Ensure that your LED wall is properly connected to LED-PRO, and that
power is enabled to all devices.
~Ensure that you know how your LED wall is cabled (e.g., horizontally or
vertically), as shown below:
Figure 4-31. LED Tile Cabling Examples
~Ensure that you know where your “first” LED tile is located, as viewed
from the front of the wall (e.g., the bottom left). This is the tile to which
LED-PRO (or Fiberlink) is connected.
2. From the Setup Menu, select Setup Wizard to display the Setup Wizard Start
Menu.
Horizontal Cabling Vertical Cabling
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 57
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
3. Press SEL to launch the wizard and display the Setup Wizard Start Message.
Figure 4-32. Setup Wizard Start Message
4. Press SEL to continue. During this interval, LED-PRO will detect the tiles, query
the tiles and count the number of tiles. The larger the LED wall, the longer the
interval.
~If no errors are detected, at the conclusion of this “detection” interval, the
Wall Information Menu is displayed as shown below.
~If errors were detected, please continue with step 5 below.
Figure 4-33. Wizard - Wall Information Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu field:
~Type — displays the type of LED tile detected.
~Count — displays the number of LED tiles detected.
~Fiber Tx ID — displays the address of the Fiberlink transmitter, if used.
~Fiber Rx ID — displays the address of the Fiberlink receiver, if used.
If no errors were detected during the “detection” interval, continue with step 6.
5. If errors were found during the “detection” interval, the Wall Information Menu
will not be shown. Instead, one of four possible messages will be shown:
~If no tiles were detected, you will be asked to “Check cabling and
power.” When complete, press SEL to continue.
~If the Fiberlink Transmitter is detected but the Receiver is not, you will
be asked to “Check cabling and power.” During this interval, a white
test pattern will appear. Press SEL to continue, and then verify that wall
is powered up.
~If both the Fiberlink Transmitter and Receiver are detected, but no tiles
are detected, you will be asked to “Check cabling and power.” During
this interval, a white test pattern will appear. Press SEL to continue, and
then verify that wall is powered up.
LED-PRO FULL WIZARD
Connect all power
and video cables
Press <SEL> to start
Note An error message will be shown if the LED wall is not
connected.
WALL INFORMATION
>Type: ILite 3
Count: 20
Fiber Tx ID 0002
Fiber Rx ID 0003
Next
58 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
~If the system detects “creative” LED tiles, such as MiSPHERE and
MiPIX, the message “Tile type not supported” will appear. Because
these tile types are not supported by the Wizard, please use Director
Toolset for setup.
6. From the Wall Information Menu, select Next to display the Set Wall
Dimensions Menu, which allows you to set the number of horizontal and vertical
tiles in the wall:
Figure 4-34. Set Wall Dimensions Menu (sample)
7. Enter the number of horizontal and vertical tiles, and press NEXT.
~If the LED tile count is correct, the Wall Data Connection Menu will be
shown. Please continue with step 8.
~If the LED tile count (as entered) is incorrect, the Tile Count Mismatch
Menu is shown.
Figure 4-35. Tile Count Mismatch Menu (sample)
Press SEL to return to the Set Wall Dimensions Menu, and enter the
correct number of horizontal and vertical tiles. Please note:
• If you enter fewer tiles than are actually detected, the system
“loops” back to the Set Wall Dimensions Menu.
• If you enter more tiles than are actually detected (and you do
this three times), a test pattern will appear to enable you to
visually check the wall for errors. At this point, check all power
and data cabling, and press SEL to continue with a repeat of
the “detection” process.
Note If any of the errors listed above are detected more than once,
the system will request that you contact Technical Support.
Set Wall Dimensions:
>Horizontal tiles: 4
Vertical tiles: 5
Next
Tile Count Mismatch.
Detected Count: 20
Entered Count: 16
Press <SEL> to fix
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 59
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
8. From the Set Wall Dimensions Menu, the Wall Data Connection Menu
appears.
Figure 4-36. Wall Data Connection Menu
~Select Horizontally if cables are connected horizontally.
~Select Vertically if cables are connected vertically.
~Select Previous to return to the previous menu in the wizard.
9. After selecting the correct data cable connection, the Tile Connection Menu
appears.
Figure 4-37. Tile Connection Menu (sample)
Highlight the correct connection point, and press SEL. Please note:
~In a standard tile array, choices are Bottom Right,Bottom Left,Top
Right, and Top Left.
~In a horizontal tile array that is one tile in height, choices are Left or
Right.
~If a vertical tile array that is one tile wide, choices are Top or Bottom.
10. Select Next to display the Rolling Grid Test Menu. During this interval, the
system configures the wall, and displays a test pattern with diagonal motion.
>How do the wall data
cables connect?
Horizontally
Vertically
Previous
>Looking at the wall
from the front, the
first tile connected
to the LED-PRO is
the:
Bottom Right
Next
Previous
60 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
The figure below illustrates the Rolling Grid Test Menu.
Figure 4-38. Rolling Grid Test Menu
~Select Yes if the grid test pattern rolls smoothly through the picture.
Please continue with step 11.
~Select No if the grid does not roll smoothly through the picture. In this
case, the system asks you to check data cabling.
• Press SEL to return to the Wall Data Connection Menu.
• Re-enter the proper horizontal or vertical cabling, and press
SEL to continue again with the Tile Connection Menu and
Rolling Grid Test Menu.
11. From the Rolling Grid Test Menu, the Position Output Menu appears.
Figure 4-39. Position Output Menu (sample)
If required:
~Select H Position and adjust the raster box for a perfect outline.
~Select H Size and adjust the raster box for a perfect outline.
~Select V Position and adjust the raster box for a perfect outline.
~Select V Size and adjust the raster box for a perfect outline.
ROLLING GRID TEST
>Is the grid Test
Pattern rolling
smoothly through
the picture?
Yes
No
Note The raster box may flash on and off, on the left and top edges
of the image. This is normal.
Position Output:
>Adjust the white box
until the top,
bottom, and sides
can all be seen.
H Position 38
H Size 288
V Position 28
V Size 270
Next
Previous
Note Typically, there should not be a need to adjust the sizes.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 61
4. Operation
Using the Setup Wizard
12. Select Next to display the Input Type Menu:
Figure 4-40. Input Type Menu (sample)
~Select PAL if your primary inputs are PAL.
~Select NTSC/PC if your primary inputs are NTSC or a PC.
This completes the Setup Wizard procedure.
13. Select Next to save the new output configuration. The system displays the Input
Wizard Query.
Figure 4-41. Input Wizard Query
~Select Yes to launch the Input Wizard. Refer to the “Using the Input
Wizard” section on page 62 for details.
~Select No to exit and display the Status Menu.
Please note the following important points regarding special “automatic” Wizard settings:
•OLite LED Tiles
If you are using OLite tiles, the Setup Wizard has automatically set the “Creative
Mode” (on the LED Menu) to Normal.
~To perform a complete “creative” setup instead, use the Director
Toolset, and then enable the creative mode on the LED Menu.
~Refer to the “Creative Mode” section on page 103 for additional details.
•SLite and DLite LED Tiles
If you are using SLite and DLite tiles, the Setup Wizard has automatically set the
“Tile Mode” (on the LED Menu) to Virtual.
~If you want to enable the “Real” mode instead:
• Select the Tile Mode function on the LED Menu, and select
Real.
• Use the Expert Mode to set up H and V sizes on the output.
~Refer to the “Tile Mode” section on page 103 for additional details.
What is the primary
input source type?
>PAL
Next
Would you like to
setup Input(s)?
>Yes
No
62 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Input Wizard
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=fåéìí=táò~êÇ
The Input Wizard allows users to easily setup and align input sources. It automatically
detects and re-scales the selected input source to match the physical size of the LED
display.
Use the following steps to run the Input Wizard:
1. Please note the following important Input Wizard prerequisites:
~Ensure that your inputs are properly connected to LED-PRO.
~Ensure that you have run the Setup Wizard, to properly configure your
LED wall.
2. From the Setup Menu (or from the last step in the Setup Wizard), select Input
Wizard to display the Input Wizard Start Menu.
3. Press SEL to launch the wizard and display the Input Wizard Start Message.
Figure 4-42. Input Wizard Start Message
4. Press SEL to display the Select Input Menu. Note that the Raster Box appears
on the LED wall.
Figure 4-43. Select Input Menu (sample)
On the menu, there are two ways to select the input that you want to adjust:
~Press the desired input button in the Inputs Section of the front panel.
~Select the Input line, and use the ADJUST knob to select the desired
input.
If selected input is invalid, the “No Input Detected” message is shown. In this
case, select another input, or check the cable connections on the input that
caused the error.
LED-PRO INPUT WIZARD
Connect all power
and video cables.
Press <SEL> to start
Note An error message will be shown if the LED wall is not
connected.
Select Input:
>Input 1: DVI
Next
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 63
4. Operation
Using the Input Wizard
5. After selecting the desired input, select Next to display the Position & Size
Menu.
Figure 4-44. Position and Size Menu (sample)
~Select H Position and adjust the input to fill the raster box precisely.
~Select H Size and adjust the input to fill the raster box precisely.
~Select V Position and adjust the input to fill the raster box precisely.
~Select V Size and adjust the input to fill the raster box precisely.
6. Select Next to display the Wall Contrast Menu, which enables you to set the LED
wall contrast — for all inputs.
Figure 4-45. Wall Contrast Menu (sample)
~Select the Value line, and adjust for the desired wall contrast — from 0 to
100. Press SEL to enable.
7. Select Next to display the Wall Location Menu, which enables you to set the LED
wall’s gamma — for all inputs.
Figure 4-46. Wall Location Menu (sample)
~Select the gamma curve line, and choose the desired mode: Inside,
Outside, or Custom.
Position & Size
>H Position 216
H Size 800
V Position 27
V Size 600
Next
Previous
Tip On the selected input source, use a full screen output signal
such as a test pattern or a “freeze frame.” In this mode, you
want to see all edges of the image clearly, with video other
than black.
Wall Contrast
>100%
Next
Previous
Wall Location
>Inside
Next
Previous
64 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Input Wizard
Please note the following important points regarding the gamma curve:
~If you previously selected (and stored) a custom gamma curve with the
Director Toolset, LED-PRO will query the tiles and recognize the curve
as “custom.”
~If you have used the “Expert Mode” to set up a gamma curve, four
values are available: Indoor 1,Indoor 2,Outdoor 1 and Outdoor 2.
• The Expert Mode’s Indoor 2 setting is recognized by the
Wizard as the Inside mode.
• The Expert Mode’s Outdoor 2 setting is recognized by the
Wizard as the Outside mode.
•Indoor 1 and Outdoor 1 settings are recognized by the Wizard
as the Custom mode.
8. Select Next to display the Save Config As Menu, which enables you to save the
input configuration for the selected input only.
Figure 4-47. Save Config As Menu (sample)
To save an input configuration:
a. Scroll to the filename field (e.g., File1) and press SEL. The navigation
cursor (>) changes to the edit cursor (#), allowing you to edit the first
character.
b. Choose a character by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
This action also selects the next character for editing.
c. Repeat step b for all desired characters.
d. When data entry is complete, press SEL again. The filename will be
truncated up to the current character position.
e. To save the input configuration under the selected filename, scroll to the
Save Config line and press SEL.
• If the selected filename has never been used, the message
"Config Saved" appears.
• If the selected filename is already in use, the Overwrite File
Menu appears.
Figure 4-48. Overwrite File Menu (sample)
• Press SEL to overwrite the file, or ...
• Press ESC to return to the Save Config As Menu, enabling
you to change the filename.
Save Config As
>File1
Save Config
Previous
Overwrite File1 ?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 65
4. Operation
Using the Input Wizard
9. When the Setup Another Input Query is shown:
~Select Yes to return to the Select Input Menu. Repeat steps 4 through
8 for each additional input.
~Select No to exit the wizard, and return to the Status Menu. After you
exit, the system performs an automatic “Save System State” procedure
to save all inputs, outputs and system configurations.
66 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=bñéÉêí=jçÇÉ=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•Expert Mode Menu Tree
•Expert Mode Menu Description
bñéÉêí=jçÇÉ=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
From the Setup Menu, select Expert Mode to display the Expert Mode Menu. The figure
below illustrates the complete Expert Mode Menu Tree.
Figure 4-49. Expert Mode Menu Tree
Setup
Menu
SETUP
Input
Input
Format
Sampling
Timing Adjust
Auto Config
Sample Phase
H Total
H Position
H Active
V Total
V Position
V Active
Type
Colorspace
Source Alignment
Source Alignment >>
Custom In
Select Custom
Save As
Delete
H Total
H Active
H Front Porch
H Sync
H Rate
V Total
V Active
V Front Porch
V Sync
V Rate
Interlaced
Aspect Ratio
Mode
Ratio
Display Mode
Letterbox
Processing
Sync Sel
Delntlc
Pulldown Cmp
Sync Slice
Save Config
Reset Config
Recall Config
Delete Config
Output
Timing Adjust
H Total
H Position
H Size
H Sync
V Total
V Position
V Size
V Sync
Lock to Src
Min Delay
Mode
Status
Save Config
Reset Config
Effects
Trans With
Trans Time
Logo
Capture Logo
Delete Logo
Logo Present
Auto Acquire
Freeze
System
VFD Bright
Diag RS-232
Ethernet
EDID DVI
Program EDID
Lock Panel
Save State
Software Vsn
Factory Rst
Expert Mode
Refresh Rate
LED Control
LED Status
LED Contrast
LED Gamma
LED Info
LED Type
Tile Count
LED-PRO ID
LED Wall ID
Fiber Tx ID
Fiber Rx ID
Mode
Type
H Phase
Baud
Parameters
Handshaking
Reset
Mode
DHCP
Set Static IP
IP
Mac
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 67
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
bñéÉêí=jçÇÉ=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Expert Mode Menu provides extensive “advanced” system setup functions. A sample
menu is shown below.
Figure 4-50. Expert Mode Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Input
•Output
•Effects
•Logo
•In Auto Acquire
•Freeze
•System
•Software Version
•Factory Reset
EXPERT MODE
>Input >>
Output >>
Effects >>
Logo >>
In Auto Acquire On
Freeze Off
System >>
Software Version >>
Factory Reset
68 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
fåéìí
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Input to display the Input Setup Menu for the
selected source. A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-51. Input Setup Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Input Format
•Sampling
•Timing Adjust
•Type
•Colorspace
•Source Alignment
•Custom In Format
•Aspect Ratio
•Display Mode
•Letterbox
•Processing
•Save Config
•Reset Config
•Recall Config
•Delete Config
•Unsaved Changes
Note The Input Setup Menu changes dynamically as you switch
input sources. The top menu line always reflects the selected
input number and format.
INPUT 1: DVI
>1024x768 @59,94
Sampling 1:1
Timing Adjust >>
Type RGB
Colorspace RGB
Source Alignment >>
Custom In Format >>
Aspect Ratio >>
Display Mode Scale
Letterbox Off
Processing >>
Save Config >>
Reset Config
Recall Config >>
Delete Config >>
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 69
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
fåéìí=cçêã~í
On the Input Setup Menu, the top “Input Format” line indicates the current input video
format in the following form:
Hact x Vact @ Vr Hz
S1024x768 @75 Hz
Please note:
•If the currently selected input does not have a valid input signal, the message
"Invalid Signal" is shown.
•When “In Auto Acquire” is enabled, the input video format will be detected in the
following search order:
~Last used configuration for the selected input channel
~Any saved input configuration
~Any custom library formats created by the user
~Standard library formats
~“Best guess” format, to the closest format in library
•If the video format is a “best guess,” it will be displayed within asterisks.
S*1024x768 @60.11*
•If the video format is recalled from a saved input configuration, a “c” is displayed
as the right most character.
S1024x768 @59.94 c
•When “In Auto Acquire” is off, LED-PRO attempts to lock to the input video
format selected by the user. If the currently selected format does not match the
input signal for the selected channel, the display remains black and the menu
indicates "Invalid Signal."
To change the input video format:
1. Select the input that you wish to change.
2. On the Input Setup Menu, select the top “Input Format” line. The navigation
cursor (>) changes to the edit cursor (#).
3. Use the knob to select the desired format. Press SEL to accept.
4. Repeat from step 1 for additional inputs, as required.
p~ãéäáåÖ
In order to scale an image, it must first be digitized. This is the process of changing the
analog graphics signals (e.g., Red, Green, and Blue) into pixels that are stored in LED-
PRO’s image memory. Two modes are available:
•The “oversample” mode produces more samples than are present in the original
input image. The oversampled image is then scaled to the final output resolution.
•The “1:1 Sampling” mode produces a superior image by sampling the analog
video signal at exactly the same rate as the original source. This method allows
the image to be re-constructed with reduced digitizing artifacts.
Note If “In Auto Acquire” is enabled, LED-PRO may change a
manually selected format back to a format that it
automatically detects.
70 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
Please note:
•The 1:1 mode requires very accurate settings, as even a small sampling error can
cause noise on the output image.
•Both the sample clock frequency and phase must be correct to obtain a properly
sampled image.
•LED-PRO incorporates automatic adjustments in the 1:1 sampling mode.
To change the sampling mode:
1. On the Input Setup Menu, select Sampling.
2. Choose either OverSample or 1:1, and press SEL to accept.
Please note:
•1:1 is the default setting.
•The OverSample option is only available for RGB and YPbPr analog inputs. All
other input types have defined sample clocks that are inherently 1:1. If the input is
set to one of the other types, the value for this selection will be “n/a.”
qáãáåÖ=^Çàìëí
From the Input Setup Menu, select Timing Adjust to display either the 1:1 Timing Adjust
Menu or the OverSample Timing Adjust Menu — depending on your selected sampling
mode. Each menu allows for exact positioning of the input signal's active area.
•1:1 Timing Adjust Menu
•OverSample Timing Adjust Menu
NWN=qáãáåÖ=^Çàìëí=jÉåì
When 1:1 sampling is selected, the 1:1 Timing Adjust Menu is shown:
Figure 4-52. 1:1 Timing Adjust Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function, which are only available when 1:1
Sampling is selected, and the input is analog RGB or YPbPr.
•Auto Config — causes the system to run the “1:1 active area acquisition”
procedure.
1:1 TIMING ADJUST
>Auto Config
Sample Phase 0
H Total 2160
H Position 496
H Active 1600
V Total 1250
V Position 49
V Active 1200
Note For the Auto Config procedure to function correctly, the input
source for the selected channel must have 50% gray or
brighter pixels around all four edges of the active area.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 71
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
•Sample Phase — enables you to fine-tune the image by adjusting the sample
clock phase. Please note:
~The adjustment range is -16 to 15.
~Zero is the default setting.
~The value is initially filled in by the Auto Config command, or set to the
default.
•H Total — enables you to adjust (in pixels) the total pixel count per line.
•H Position — adjusts (in pixels) the offset of the start of active area from H sync.
•H Active — adjusts (in pixels) the size of the active area.
•V Total — adjusts (in lines) the total line count per frame.
•V Position — adjusts (in lines) the offset of the start of active area from V sync.
•V Active — adjusts (in lines) the size of the active area.
lîÉêp~ãéäÉ=qáãáåÖ=^Çàìëí=jÉåì
When OverSample is selected, the Oversample Timing Adjust Menu is shown:
Figure 4-53. OverSample Timing Adjust Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function, which are only available when
OverSample is selected.
•Right Edge — adjusts (in pixels) the right edge location, relative to the start of H
Sync.
•Left Edge — adjusts (in pixels) the left edge location, relative to the start of H
Sync.
•Top Edge — adjusts (in lines) the top edge, relative to the start of V Sync.
•Bottom Edge — adjusts (in lines) the bottom edge, relative to the start of V Sync.
Note H Total cannot be adjusted if the input type is DVI or SDI.
Tip When adjusting input timing, turn on the Output Raster Box,
and adjust the input image to align with all four edges of the
raster box.
OVRSMP TIMING ADJUST
>Right Edge 2096
Left Edge 496
Top Edge 49
Bottom Edge 1249
Tip When adjusting input timing, turn on the Output Raster Box,
and adjust the input image to align with all four edges of the
raster box.
72 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
qóéÉ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Type to choose among the possible signal types
available at the current input channel. Please note:
•Values are: RGB, YPbPr, NTSC/PAL/SECAM, SDI, and DVI.
•When “In Auto Acquire” is enabled, the “type” selections will be limited
depending on the signal present on the currently selected input.
SIf input 1 is connected to a DVI source, DVI will be the only choice — which
cannot be changed. Similarly, SDI will be the only choice whenever the SDI
input is selected.
•When “In Auto Acquire” is off, the “type” selections are expanded to allow you to
manually select the Video type.
`çäçêëé~ÅÉ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Colorspace to choose among the possible component
video standards for YPbPr. Please note:
•Values are: RGB, SMPTE, BETA and M-II.
•For all other video types, color space is set to RGB and cannot be changed.
•The default selection for YPbPr is SMPTE. You may change this setting to BETA
or M-II to allow the LED-PRO to correctly sample the Y, Pb and Pr components
across their full dynamic range.
pçìêÅÉ=^äáÖåãÉåí
From the Input Setup Menu, select Source Alignment to display one of three Source
Alignment menus — depending upon the format of the selected source — analog, SDI or
DVI. These procedures are identical to those located on the Setup Menu.
•For analog input sources, refer to the “Source Alignment — Analog” section on
page 43 for instructions.
•For SDI input sources, refer to the “Source Alignment — SDI” section on
page 46 for instructions.
•For DVI input sources, refer to the “Source Alignment — DVI” section on
page 48 for instructions.
`ìëíçã=få=cçêã~í
From the Input Setup Menu, select Custom In Format to display the Custom Input
Formats Menu, which enables you to define and save a new input video format — or to
edit and save a previously-defined format. Please note:
•Saved formats are stored in a user library, which is searched (after the standard
system library is searched) during the auto-acquisition process.
•All saved formats are available as input formats on any input channel.
•A maximum of 32 custom formats may be stored.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 73
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
The figure below illustrates the Custom Input Formats Menu:
Figure 4-54. Custom Input Formats Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Custom Format — enables you to select a custom format. The choices consist
of the formats within the standard formats library (excluding TV standard formats)
plus any previously-defined formats. The initial value is 720x480p.
•Save As — enables you to save custom parameters in non-volatile memory — to
an existing or new name. If the “Save As” function is not selected, the information
will not be restored upon the next system power up.
To save a custom format:
a. From the Custom Input Formats Menu, select Save As to display the
Save Custom Format As menu.
Figure 4-55. Save Custom Format As Menu (sample)
b. Scroll to the format name field (e.g., Format1) and press SEL. The
navigation cursor (>) changes to the edit cursor (#), allowing you to edit
the first character.
c. Choose a character by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
This action also selects the next character for editing.
d. Repeat step c for all desired characters.
e. When data entry is complete, press SEL again.
f. To save the format under the selected name, scroll to the Save line and
press SEL.
CUSTOM INPUT FORMATS
>720x480p
Save As >>
Delete >>
H Total 858
H Active 720
H Front Porch 16
H Sync 63
H Rate (KHz) 31.47
V Total 525
V Active 483
V Front Porch 6
V Sync 6
V Rate (Hz) 59.94
Interlaced Off
SAVE FORMAT AS
>Format1
Save
74 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
• If the selected filename has never been used, the message
"Format Saved" appears.
• If the selected filename is already in use, the Overwrite
Custom Format Menu appears.
Figure 4-56. Overwrite Custom Format Menu (sample)
– Press SEL to overwrite the file.
– Press ESC to return to the Save Format As Menu,
enabling you to change the filename.
Please note:
~If the format library is full, the “Library Full” message will be shown. In
this case, it is recommended that you press ESC, scroll through the
names already in the library, and replace one of them.
~If you attempt to save a new format with a reserved name (one that is
already used in the standard library), the “Reserved Name” message
will be shown. In this case, it is recommended that you press ESC, and
re-edit the name.
•Delete — enables you to delete any saved user formats from the library.
To delete a custom format:
a. From the Custom Input Formats Menu, select Delete to display the
Delete Format Menu.
Figure 4-57. Delete Format Menu (sample)
b. Scroll to the format name field and press SEL. The navigation cursor
(>) changes to the edit cursor (#).
c. Choose a format by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
d. To delete the format, scroll to the Delete line and press SEL.
e. When the “confirmation” screen appears,
• Press SEL to delete the file.
• Press ESC to return to the Delete Format Menu, enabling you
select a different file, or cancel the procedure (via ESC).
Please note:
~If the selected format is the current output format in use, or the output
format currently saved in the output configuration, the “Output Format
In Use” message will be shown. Press ESC to continue.
Special1
Overwrite Format?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
DELETE FORMAT
>Special1
Delete
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 75
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
~If the selected format is the current input format in use, or the input
format currently saved in an input configuration, the “Input Format In
Use” message will be shown. Press ESC to continue.
•H Total — enables you to adjust (in pixels) the total pixel count per line.
•H Active — adjusts (in pixels) the size of the active area.
•H Front Porch — adjusts (in pixels) the width of the horizontal front porch.
•H Sync — adjusts (in pixels) the width of the sync pulse.
•H Rate (KHz) — indicates the horizontal rate in KHz, as computed from the other
parameters.
•V Total — adjusts (in lines) the total line count per frame.
•V Active — adjusts (in lines) the size of the active area.
•V Front Porch — adjusts (in lines) the number of lines that comprise the vertical
front porch.
•V Sync — adjusts (in lines) the number of lines that comprise the vertical sync
pulse.
•V Rate (Hz) — sets the vertical sync rate of the format in Hz.
•Interlaced — allows you enable or disable interlacing. When enabled, the V
Total value will be forced to an odd number.
Please note the following important point regarding custom formats:
•If you change any parameter within the Custom Input Formats Menu, but you do
not save the format (using the Save As function), the “Save Custom Format”
message will be shown when you attempt to exit the menu:
Figure 4-58. Save Custom Format Message
~Press SEL to save the changes. The Save Format As Menu will be
shown.
~Press ESC to continue operations without saving changes.
Note For this function and the following H and V functions, the
possible range for any one is determined in part by the values
of the others. Changing one value will not change any other
values, but it will limit the range available for other values.
Total = Front Porch + Sync Width + Back Porch + Active
Save Custom Format?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
76 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
^ëéÉÅí=o~íáç
From the Input Setup Menu, select Aspect Ratio to display the Input Aspect Ratio
Menu. This menu enables you to set the input source’s aspect ratio to a predefined or
custom ratio. LED-PRO selects and displays the source’s aspect ratio according to the
input format detected.
SComputer video at 1280x1024@60Hz defaults to 5:4.
SNTSC video default to 4:3.
SHDTV1080i video defaults to 16:9.
The figure below illustrates the Input Aspect Ratio Menu:
Figure 4-59. Input Aspect Ratio Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Mode — enables you to select an aspect ratio. Choices are 1:1, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4,
16:9 and Custom.
•Ratio — this function is only selectable when Custom is selected as the mode.
The ratio is a decimal number ranging from 0.750 to 3.000. The default value
depends on the last predefined ratio selected, prior to selecting Custom.
aáëéä~ó=jçÇÉ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Display Mode to select one of two display modes:
•Crop — select this option to map the input (or a portion of the input) to the output
with no scaling (1:1). For proper results, the Input Horizontal and Vertical
Actives (size) must match the Output Actives. Then, using the Vertical and
Horizontal Position, locate the desired portion of the video to be displayed
•Scale — select this option to map an entire input video into the LED display.
Typically, this means that image will be down-scaled:
S1600x1200 input video mapped into an 800x600 LED display.
Note that Input Position adjustments may still be required.
iÉííÉêÄçñ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Letterbox to enable or disable the letterbox function:
•Off — the image fills the entire output raster.
•On — the top and bottom edges of the raster are cropped to a 16:9 ratio. This
feature is especially useful with widescreen DVDs, enabling you to process them
without seeing the black bars at the top and bottom of the image.
INPUT ASPECT RATIO
>Mode 4:3
Ratio n/a
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 77
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
mêçÅÉëëáåÖ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Processing to display the Processing Menu which
enables you to adjust a variety of image processing parameters.
Figure 4-60. Processing Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Sync Sel — this function applies to analog RGB inputs only. The digital input
sources have embedded syncs, and the composite, S-video, and YPbPr inputs
always will take the sync from the Y (or composite) channel. For these inputs, the
value field will indicate n/a.
~Choices are: Auto,H/V,CSync and SOG.
~In Auto mode, the system will find sync in any of the three possible
sources. If one of the sources is explicitly chosen, the system uses only
that input as a sync source, unless it finds there is no sync input present
— in which case it acts as if Auto mode is enabled.
•DeIntlc — in order to process an interlaced source, LED-PRO must first de-
interlace the image. De-interlacing is the process by which interlaced video is
converted to progressive format. Please note:
~Interlaced video — even lines are scanned during one field and odd
lines are scanned during the next field.
~Progressive video — lines in the frame are sequentially scanned.
LED-PRO utilizes an advanced Motion Adaptive De-interlacing (MAD)
techniques to de-interlace most video sources up to HDTV (1920 x 1080i) rates.
When the MAD de-interlacing mode is selected, maximum video processing delay
is 2 input fields (or 3 fields, if the output is not frame-locked to the input).
An alternate mode, Field to Frame (Fld->Frm), avoids motion artifacts by
converting individual input fields to progressive output frames. While vertical
resolution will be reduced in this mode, a significant reduction in video processing
delay is achieved.
•Pulldown Comp — this function allows you to enable or disable 3:2 Pulldown
Detection. The function should be enabled to process video derived from film
source material. Please note:
~The function only applies to standard video inputs (composite,
component, and s-video).
~The default mode is off.
•Sync Slice (mV) — this function enables you to select the sync comparator
threshold for RGsB (RGB with Sync on Green) or YPbPr analog component video
sources. Please note:
~The value ranges from 20mV to 280mV, adjustable in steps of 10mV.
~The default value is 160mV.
PROCESSING
>Sync Sel Auto
DeIntlc n/a
Pulldown Comp n/a
Sync Slice (mV) n/a
78 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
~When LED-PRO detects Macrovision copy protection on the incoming
YPbPr NTSC/PAL video, the value is automatically repositioned to 60mV
to account for the reduced amplitude sync pulse.
p~îÉ=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Save Config to display the Save Config As Menu,
which allows you to save and name up to 60 input configurations.
oÉëÉí=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Reset Config to remove all user-entered configuration
settings from the current input.
oÉÅ~ää=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Recall Config to display the Recall Config Menu,
which enables you to recall input configurations that were previously saved for the currently
selected input format and type.
Note The default Sync Slice level has been optimized for virtually
all sources that will be encountered and should rarely, if ever,
require adjustment. However, the ability to adjust the level is
provided to improve sync detection and synchronization in
cases of extremely noisy RGsB or YPbPr video signals.
Note The Save Config function (in the Input Setup Menu) is
identical to that found in the Input Position Menu. Refer to
the “Save Config” section on page 107 for instructions.
Note The Reset Config function (in the Input Setup Menu) is
identical to that found in the Input Position Menu. Refer to
the “Reset Config” section on page 108 for instructions.
Note The Recall Config function (in the Input Setup Menu) is
identical to that found in the Input Position Menu. Refer to
the “Recall Config” section on page 109 for instructions.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 79
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
aÉäÉíÉ=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Setup Menu, select Delete Config to display the Delete Config Menu,
which enables you to delete any input configurations that were previously saved.
Figure 4-61. Delete Config Menu (sample)
To delete an input configuration:
1. Scroll to the filename field (e.g., File1) and press SEL. The navigation cursor (>)
changes to the edit cursor (#), allowing you to browse the file list.
2. Choose a file by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
3. Scroll to the Delete Config line and press SEL to display the Delete
Confirmation Menu.
~Press SEL to delete the configuration.
~Press ESC to return to the Delete Config Menu, enabling you to select a
different file, or return safely to the Input Setup Menu (via ESC).
råë~îÉÇ=`Ü~åÖÉë
If you change any parameter within the Input Setup Menu, but you do not save the input
configuration (using the Save Config function), the “Save Input Configuration” message
will be shown when you attempt to exit the menu:
Figure 4-62. Save Input Configuration Message
~Press SEL to save the changes. The Save Configuration As Menu will
be shown. Refer to the “Save Config” section on page 107 for
instructions.
~Press ESC to continue operations without saving changes.
DELETE CONFIG
>File 1
Delete Config
Note If the deleted input configuration is currently used by any
input channel, the system restores the format parameters to
the default library values for those channels.
Save Input Cfg?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
80 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
lìíéìí
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Output to display the LED Output Menu which
enables you to configure the LED-PRO output.
Figure 4-63. LED Output Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Timing Adjust
•Refresh Rate
•LED Control
•LED Status
•LED Contrast
•LED Gamma
•LED Information
•Lock to Source
•Minimum Delay
•Save Config
•Reset Config
LED OUTPUT
>Timing Adjust >>
Refresh Rate 60 Hz
LED Control Local
LED Status Enabled
LED Contrast 100%
LED Gamma Indoor 2
LED Information >>
Lock To Source >>
Minimum Delay >>
Save Config
Reset Config
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 81
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
qáãáåÖ=^Çàìëí
From the LED Output Menu, select Timing Adjust to display the Output Timing Adjust
Menu, which enables you to make adjustments to the currently selected output format’s
timing parameters. A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-64. Output Timing Adjust Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•H Total — adjusts (in pixels) the total pixel count per line — for the selected
output.
•H Position — adjusts (in pixels) the offset of the start of active area from H sync.
•H Size — adjusts (in pixels) the size of the active area.
•H Sync — adjusts (in pixels) the H sync width.
•V Total — adjusts (in lines) the total line count per frame.
•V Position — adjusts (in lines) the offset of the start of active area from V sync.
•V Size — adjusts (in lines) the size of the active area.
•V Sync — adjusts (in lines) the V sync width.
oÉÑêÉëÜ=o~íÉ
From the LED Output Menu, scroll to the Refresh Rate function and press SEL to adjust
the output’s refresh rate. If the LED tile type is known, this function also sets the refresh
rate for the wall.
•Values are 60 Hz or 50 Hz.
TIMING ADJUST
>H Total 840
H Position 38
H Size 800
H Sync 10
V Total 636
V Position 28
V Size 600
V Sync 10
Note When the output format is NTSC or PAL, H Total and V Total
cannot be changed.
Important The 60 Hz setting is actually 59.94 Hz. This setting is
intended for use with NTSC and PC inputs.
82 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
iba=`çåíêçä
From the LED Output Menu, select LED Control to choose whether the Barco LED wall is
controlled by LED-PRO or by an external application such as Director Toolset.
•When set to Remote, the Director Toolset GUI has full control of the RS-232 port
and can communicate with LED-PRO and the LED Wall.
•When set to Local, LED-PRO is communicating with the LED wall, and any
commands from the GUI are ignored.
iba=pí~íìë
From the LED Output Menu, select LED Status to change the connected Barco LED Wall
(and/or Fiberlink) from “Standby” to “Enabled” mode.
•Selecting Standby powers down the LED wall.
•Selecting Enabled powers up the LED wall.
iba=`çåíê~ëí
From the LED Output Menu, select LED Contrast to adjust the overall contrast of the LED
wall. Please note:
•The selected value is not updated until SEL is pressed.
•This command is only applicable when LED Control is set to Local.
iba=d~ãã~
From the LED Output Menu, select LED Gamma to specify the Gamma curve associated
with the current output. There are several types of gamma curves selectable: Indoor1,
Indoor2,Outdoor1,Outdoor2 and Custom (if present). Please note:
•The selected Gamma is not updated until SEL is pressed.
•This command is only applicable when LED Control is set to Local.
iba=fåÑçêã~íáçå
From the LED Output Menu, select LED Information to display the LED Information
Menu which displays data about the LED wall and fiber communications (if utilized).
Note In local mode, LED-PRO is capable of setting up and
configuring an LED wall. However, custom gamma values
and wall calibration must be performed with Director Toolset.
Note When Standby mode is enabled, the connected Barco LED
wall will be non-responsive — and changes (or updates)
cannot be performed.
Note The LED Information Menu (in the LED Output Menu) is
identical to that found in the LED Menu. Refer to the “LED
Information” section on page 101 for instructions.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 83
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
içÅâ=íç=pçìêÅÉ
From the LED Output Menu, select Lock to Source to display the Lock To Source Menu,
which enables you to set “lock to source” parameters:
Figure 4-65. Lock to Source Menu
In order to eliminate video processing delay associated with frame rate conversion, it is
recommended that you lock the LED-PRO to the input source frame rate, using this
function. Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Mode — enables or disables the Lock to Source mode.
•Type — selects the Lock to Source type. The choices depend on the selected
mode. If the mode is disabled, the type is n/a. The available types are:
~V Lock — vertical lock only. This mode is always available for all input
and output resolutions.
~HV Lock — both horizontal and vertical lock. This mode is available only
if the input and output V Totals are the same.
•H Phase — allows the output H timing to be adjusted relative to the Lock to
Source mode. Please note:
~This selection is n/a when the type is set to V lock.
~The range is +/- one-half the H Total.
jáåáãìã=aÉä~ó
From the LED Output Menu, select Minimum Delay to display the Minimum Delay
Menu, which enables you to minimize delay through the system if desired.
Figure 4-66. Minimum Delay Menu (sample)
Please note the following important points:
•Disable the “minimum delay” mode when LED-PRO is performing scaling and
deinterlacing — in order to convert a video format.
LOCK TO SOURCE
>Mode Disable
Type n/a
H Phase n/a
Important When Lock to Source is enabled, LED-PRO does not allow
you to switch input channels. You can only switch to/from the
current input channel and the Black/Logo channel.
MINIMUM DELAY
>Mode On
Status: Active
84 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
•Enable the “minimum delay” mode when an another image processor (such as an
Encore or ScreenPRO-II) is used to process the video and create multiple
windows. The external processor then feeds LED-PRO in a progressive 800x600
format. In this case, LED-PRO does not need to scale the image, and operates in
a “minimum delay” mode so as not to introduce additional delay into the system.
For the “minimum delay” function to work properly:
•V Lock or HV Lock must be enabled on the Lock to Source Menu.
•V Size on your input must match V Size on the output.
On the Mode line, enable or disable Minimum Delay.
•When Off, status is n/a, and the delay through the system is no greater that 1.5
frames.
•When On, delay through the system is a maximum 20 lines, and status reads
“Active.”
p~îÉ=`çåÑáÖ
From the LED Output Menu, select Save Config to save all current output configuration
settings in non-volatile memory. The message “Saving Configuration” is shown. Note
that there is only one output configuration file.
Once saved, the output values are retained across power cycles. If you do not save the
parameters, the information will not be restored upon the next system power up.
Please note the following important point regarding the LED Output Menu:
•If you change any parameter in the LED Output Menu, but you do not save the
changes (using the Save Config function), the “Save Output Configuration”
message will be shown when you attempt to exit the menu:
Figure 4-67. Save Output Configuration Message
~Press SEL to save the changes.
~Press ESC to continue operations without saving changes.
oÉëÉí=`çåÑáÖ
From the LED Output Menu, select Reset Config to remove all user-entered configuration
settings, and restore the default values for the current output format. The message
“Resetting Configuration” is shown.
Note that this command also clears the saved configuration (if any), so that the system will
not restore the unwanted configuration at power up.
Note If either of the two prerequisites are not met, an error
message will be shown.
Save Output Cfg?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 85
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
bÑÑÉÅíë
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Effects to display the Effects Menu which enables
you to select the transition effect that is used when switching between input channels.
Figure 4-68. Effects Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Trans With
•Trans Time
qê~åë=táíÜ
Scroll to the Trans With function and press SEL to change the desired transition type. Use
the knob to select, and press SEL to accept. Choices are:
•Img Cut — the currently selected channel freezes, the new channel's video is
acquired and cut to the output.
•Blk Fade — the currently selected channel fades to black, then the new channel's
video transitions in. The transition rate is determined by the Trans Time value.
•Logo — this mode is only selectable if there is stored LOGO image in non-volatile
memory. The currently selected channel dissolves to the stored LOGO, then the
new channel's video dissolves in. The rate is determined by the Trans Time.
qê~åë=qáãÉ
Scroll to the Trans Time function and press SEL to change the transition time (or rate),
from 1.0 to 5.0 seconds. Use the knob to change the rate, then press SEL to accept.
EFFECTS
>Trans With Blk Fade
Trans Time 1.0
Note Transition times function best when the auto-acquire mode is
turned off. When auto-acquire is enable, transition times will
be greater — due to the additional time required to analyze
the input video timing. Refer to the “In Auto Acquire” section
on page 87 for details.
86 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
içÖç
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Effects to display the Logo Menu, which enables
you to save and delete a LOGO. LED-PRO stores one logo in non-volatile memory.
Figure 4-69. Logo Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Capture Logo
•Delete Logo
•Logo Present
`~éíìêÉ=içÖç
Scroll to the Capture Logo function and press SEL to save the current “active” image as
the LOGO.
Note that you can also capture a LOGO by pressing and hold the desired input button, then
pressing the LOGO button. In Chapter 2, refer to the “About the LOGO” section on
page 14 for more information.
aÉäÉíÉ=içÖç
Scroll to the Delete Logo function and press SEL to delete the current LOGO from
memory. The front panel LOGO button will then display Internal Black when pressed.
içÖç=mêÉëÉåí
The Logo Present line indicates current LOGO status:
•Yes — an image is present in Logo memory.
•No — a logo is not present in memory. Internal black will be displayed.
LOGO
>Capture Logo n/a
Delete Logo n/a
Logo Present No
Tip Use the Freeze function to capture a frame of video, then use
the Capture Logo function to save it. Refer to the “Freeze”
section on page 87 for details.
Note The Capture Logo and Delete Logo functions are not
available (n/a) if the LOGO button is currently selected.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 87
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
få=^ìíç=^ÅèìáêÉ
From the Expert Mode Menu, scroll to the In Auto Acquire function to enable or disable
the automatic input acquisition (auto-acquire) function. Press SEL, use the knob to select
the desired mode, then press SEL to accept.
•On — in this (default) mode, the system always performs a full sync acquisition on
the input signal in the following conditions:
~Any time the input channel is selected.
~Any time the input type is changed.
~Any time the input signal changes sync rates.
•Off — in this mode, the system uses the last known configuration for each input
channel, to the greatest extent possible. Please note:
~At some point, the input signal may be too far away from the saved
configuration, in which case a good input lock may not be possible.
~If the input signal is too different from the saved configuration to be
usable, then the <in_format> field in the Status Display will read
"Invalid Signal."
Please note the following important points regarding the In Auto Acquire mode:
•It is recommended that the In Auto Acquire mode remain on for most users. In
this mode, LED-PRO automatically detects and acquires the input video type and
resolution in most cases — and limits menu selections as applicable to the
detected type.
•Advanced users that already know a source’s video timing parameters may
choose to turn In Auto Acquire off — and select the timing manually.
•The In Auto Acquire mode should be turned off when using transitions,
especially when you have already configured and saved the unit's input setup.
~Turning auto-acquire off provides the fastest transition times for
switching between inputs.
~When auto-acquire is on, transition times will be greater due to the
additional time required to analyze the input video timing.
Refer to the “Trans With” section on page 85 for details about transitions.
cêÉÉòÉ
From the Expert Mode Menu, scroll to the Freeze function to enable or disable the freeze
mode. Press SEL, use the knob to select the desired mode, then press SEL to accept.
The mode is not updated until SEL is pressed.
•Off — in this (default) mode, the image is not frozen
•On — select to freeze the input source.
~When enabled, the PAN & ZOOM and INPUT POS buttons are not
operational.
~When enabled, the Input Setup and View menus are inaccessible,
because since these adjustments cannot be applied to a frozen image.
Note If another input is selected, the Freeze mode is automatically
turned off.
88 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
póëíÉã
From the Expert Mode Menu, select System to display the System Menu, which enables
you to adjust a variety of system parameters, such as the display brightness, Ethernet and
Diagnostic RS-232 settings, and panel lock.
Figure 4-70. System Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•VFD Brightness
•Diagnostic RS232
•Ethernet
•EDID DVI In Frmt
•Lock Front Panel
•Save System State
•Unsaved Changes
sca=_êáÖÜíåÉëë
On the System Menu, scroll to the VFD Brightness function and press SEL to adjust the
intensity of the front panel vacuum fluorescent display (VFD). The adjustment range is -7
(dimmest) to 8(brightest). The factory default setting is 2.
aá~ÖåçëíáÅ=opOPO
On the System Menu, select the Diagnostic RS232 function to display the Diagnostic
RS232 Menu, which enables you to set Diagnostic Port parameters.
Figure 4-71. Diagnostic RS232 Menu (sample)
SYSTEM
>VFD Brightness +2
Diagnostic RS232 >>
Ethernet >>
EDID DVI In Frmt >>
Lock Front Panel
Save System State
Tip Whenever possible, use a low intensity setting to avoid "burn-
in" of the display.
DIAGNOSTIC RS232
>Baud 38400
Parameters N81
Handshaking On
Reset
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 89
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
Following are descriptions of all menu functions:
•Baud — selects the baud rate. Values are: 1200, 2400, 9600, 19200, 38400.
•Parameters — select from the following values: N81, E71, O71, E72, O72.
•Handshaking — select from the following values: Off or On (CTS/RTS).
•Reset — enables you to restore the RS-232 settings to defaults: 38400, N81,
Handshake On.
Please note the following important points regarding diagnostic communications:
•After connecting your PC’s COM port to LED-PRO’s Diagnostic Port, you may
open a serial terminal session (using HyperTerminal, Procomm, etc.), and
configure the PC to match LED-PRO’s serial port settings as configured in the
Diagnostic RS-232 Menu.
•At this point, the LED-PRO command prompt (#) will be displayed at the terminal.
•Type "Help" to see a list of remote commands supported. In Appendix B, refer to
the “LED-PRO Remote Commands” section on page 128 for a complete list of
commands and descriptions.
bíÜÉêåÉí
On the System Menu, select the Ethernet function to display the Ethernet Menu, which
enables you to set Ethernet parameters.
Figure 4-72. Ethernet Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of all menu functions:
•Mode — enables or disables Ethernet communications by turning the LED-PRO’s
Ethernet port on or off.
•DHCP — turns DHCP on or off.
~When on, LED-PRO queries the DHCP server for a valid IP address. If
the LED-PRO finds a DHCP server and receives an IP address, the IP
address is shown. If a server is not found, the unit does not get an IP
address allotted to it.
~When off, you can manually enter a static IP address (with valid subnet
mask and gateway) for Ethernet communication to properly function.
Consult with your network administrator for a valid IP address, subnet
mask and gateway.
ETHERNET
>Mode Off
DHCP Off
Set Static IP >>
IP 192.168.000.200
M 00:20:4A:84:9A:EE
Note It takes several seconds for the unit to query the Ethernet port
and obtain the IP address. During this time the SEL button
will remain lit.
90 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
•Set Static IP — select the Set Static IP function to display the SET IP Menu.
This menu enables you to manually set a subnet mast, gateway, and static IP
address when a DHCP server is not available. The menu is only accessible when
DHCP is Off.
Figure 4-73. Set IP Menu (sample)
To set a subnet mask, gateway and IP address:
a. Scroll to the Sub line, and press SEL to begin editing the subnet mask.
The first “quad” is highlighted.
b. Rotate the knob to select the desired value — from 000 to 255.
c. Press SEL to accept, and advance the edit cursor to the next quad.
d. Repeat for all remaining quads. When complete, the navigation cursor is
restored.
e. Scroll to the GW line, and press SEL to begin editing the gateway.
f. Repeat steps b through d for all remaining quads.
g. Scroll to the IP line, and press SEL to begin editing the IP address.
h. Repeat steps b through d for all remaining quads.
i. When complete, press ESC to return to the Ethernet Menu, and verify
that the IP address is correct. At this point, all new static IP values are
active.
Please note the following important points:
~Only after setting the IP address will LED-PRO attempt to set the
Ethernet port.
~An IP address of 000.000.000.000 indicates that you are not interested
in Ethernet communication, and to ignore the Ethernet port.
~It takes several seconds for the unit to communicate with the Ethernet
port and set the IP address. During this time, the SEL key remains lit.
SET IP
>SUB 255.255.255.000
GW 192.168.000.001
IP 192.168.000.200
Important Before using this menu, consult with your network
administrator to make sure that the assigned IP address is
valid, and that the Subnet mask and Gateway are set
appropriately. Ensure that you set the subnet mask and
gateway prior to setting the IP address.
Note If desired, press ESC at any point before pressing SEL to
cancel all edits and leave the address value unchanged.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 91
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
To communicate with LED-PRO via Ethernet:
a. Ensure that all Ethernet setup is complete
b. On a Microsoft® Windows® PC, open a command prompt window and
type the following and press ENTER:
> telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 10001
... where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address as set, 10001 is the port.
c. Once Ethernet communications have been established, the Telnet
window functions in a similar manner to a serial COM port
communication session. If required, consult with your network
administrator to ensure that LED-PRO can communicate with the PC.
•IP — indicates the current IP address. If an IP address has not been established,
if no DHCP server has been found, or if the network cable is not connected, the IP
address reads "000.000.000.000.”
•M — indicates the MAC (hardware) address of the Ethernet port.
bafa=asf=få=cêãí
On the System Menu, select the EDID In Frmat function to display the EDID In Format
Menu, which enables you to update LED-PRO's preferred EDID resolution. Refer to the
“Programming EDID” section on page 53 for instructions.
içÅâ=cêçåí=m~åÉä
On the System Menu, scroll to the Lock Front Panel function and press SEL to lock all
front panel controls. This function is designed to prevent tampering with the panel while
LED-PRO is under remote control. The Front Panel Lockout Menu appears, which alerts
the user and display’s the system ID:
Figure 4-74. Front Panel Lockout Menu (sample)
To unlock the panel from the front panel:
1. Press and hold the SEL and ESC buttons simultaneously, for 3 seconds. When
the panel unlocks, the system returns to the Status Menu.
Note This procedure is identical to the EDID DVI procedure located
in the Source Alignment Menu (SETUP > Source
Alignment > EDID DVI).
Front Panel
Locked Out.
LEDPRO ID: 0001
Note The system ID is preset at the factory to 1, and can only be
changed with the Director Toolset. If you use Director
Toolset to change the ID, and then perform a factory reset on
LED-PRO or run the Setup Wizard, the ID returns to 1.
92 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Expert Mode Menu
To unlock the panel via the command line interface:
1. Use the LOCKOUT command. In Appendix B, refer to the “LOCKOUT” section
on page 156 for details.
p~îÉ=póëíÉã=pí~íÉ
On the System Menu, scroll to the Save System State function and press SEL to save all
system parameters in non-volatile memory. The message “Saving System State” is
shown. If you do not save changes, information will not be restored at the next power up.
råë~îÉÇ=`Ü~åÖÉë
If you change any parameter within the System Menu, but you do not save the changes
(using the Save System State function), the “Save System Configuration” message will
be shown when you attempt to exit the menu:
Figure 4-75. Save System Configuration Message
~Press SEL to save the changes.
~Press ESC to continue operations without saving changes.
pçÑíï~êÉ=sÉêëáçå
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Software Version to display the Software Version
Menu, which displays the system’s installed version of code.
Figure 4-76. Software Version Menu
c~Åíçêó=oÉëÉí
From the Expert Mode Menu, select Factory Reset to display the Factory Reset Menu,
which enables you to reset LED-PRO to its "factory default" condition. Refer to the
“Factory Reset” section on page 52 for instructions.
Note This function is identical to the Save System State function
located in the Setup Menu.
Save System Cfg?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
SOFTWARE VERSION
Version 2.00
Note This function is identical to the Factory Reset function
located in the Setup Menu.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 93
4. Operation
Using the Test Pattern Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=qÉëí=m~ííÉêå=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section
•Test Pattern Menu Tree
•Test Pattern Menu Description
qÉëí=m~ííÉêå=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
Press TEST PAT to access the Test Pattern Menu. The figure below illustrates the
complete menu tree — there are no sub-menus.
Figure 4-77. Test Pattern Menu Tree
qÉëí=m~ííÉêå=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Test Pattern Menu allows you to control test patterns, the raster box and diagonal
motion. A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-78. Test Pattern Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Type
•Raster Box
•Diagonal Motion
TEST PATTERN
Type Burst
>Raster Box Off
Diagonal Motion Off
Test Pattern
Menu
Type
Raster Box
Diagonal Motion
TEST
PAT
94 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Test Pattern Menu
qóéÉ
On the Test Pattern Menu, select the Type field to enable or disable a test pattern.
Choices are:
•Off
•H Ramp
•V Ramp
•100% Col Bars
•75% Col bars
•16x16 Grid
•32x32 Grid
•Burst
•50% Gray
•Gray Steps 1
•Gray Steps 2
•White
•Black
o~ëíÉê=_çñ
On the Test Pattern Menu, select the Raster Box field to enable or disable the system’s
raster box. The raster box is a one-pixel border that is placed around the active output
area. With the box enabled, you can precisely align the input video to fill the selected
output raster video. The border is shown as a dashed line intentionally, allowing you to
view the input video behind it and easily align the input video.
aá~Öçå~ä=jçíáçå
On the Test Pattern Menu, select the Diagonal Motion field to enable or disable diagonal
motion. When enabled, the selected test pattern (or raster box) moves from the bottom
right to the upper left, allowing you to check that video is live to the LED wall — and not
simply frozen.
Note Once you enable a test pattern and exit the Test Pattern
Menu, the TEST PAT button remains lit to indicate that a
pattern is active. In this mode, regardless of the selected
input, only the test pattern will be visible.
Note The raster box can be enabled or disabled, independent of
the test pattern.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 95
4. Operation
Using the Pan & Zoom Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=m~å=C=wççã=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section
•Pan & Zoom Menu Tree
•Pan & Zoom Menu Description
m~å=C=wççã=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
Press PAN & ZOOM to access the Pan & Zoom Menu. The figure below illustrates the
complete menu tree — there are no sub-menus.
Figure 4-79. Pan & Zoom Menu Tree
Pan & Zoom
Menu
Pan H
Pan V
Zoom
Save Preset
Recall Preset
Reset
PAN &
ZOOM
96 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Pan & Zoom Menu
m~å=C=wççã=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Pan & Zoom Menu allows you to pan, tilt and zoom a selected input, and save the
results in a local “Preset” — an internal file held in non-volatile memory for the specific input
only. For example, you can define a preset that maps the entire input image to the upper
left quarter of the output image. Please note:
•Independent pan and zoom values are maintained for each input.
•While the menu is active, you can change inputs by selecting buttons in the front
panel’s Inputs Section. After the system transitions to the new input, all Pan and
Zoom values on the menu update.
•This is the only location within the menu tree where inputs can be panned and
zoomed.
A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-80. Pan & Zoom Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•Pan H
•Pan V
•Zoom
•Save Preset
•Recall Preset
•Reset
m~å=e
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Pan H to pan the selected input horizontally.
•Values range from -100.0% to +100.0%.
•0% means that the center of the input image coincides with the center of the
output image.
•An positive value moves the image to the right.
•The screen updates when SEL is pressed.
m~å=s
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Pan V to pan (tilt) the selected input vertically.
•Values range from -100.0% to +100.0%.
PAN & ZOOM
>Pan H +0.0%
Pan V +0.0%
Zoom 100.0%
Save Preset
Recall Preset
Reset
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 97
4. Operation
Using the Pan & Zoom Menu
•0% means that the center of the input image coincides with the center of the
output image.
•A positive value moves the image downward.
•The screen updates when SEL is pressed.
wççã
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Zoom to zoom the selected input in and out.
•The default value is 100%.
•Values range from 7.1% to 1024.0%.
•Values above 100% increase image size (zoom in). Values below 100% decrease
size (zoom out).
p~îÉ=mêÉëÉí
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Save Preset to save the selected input’s current pan
and zoom settings in memory. A brief message is shown on the display, indicating that the
preset is being saved. Note that the saved preset will be restored on power up for the
corresponding input. The function saves a “local” preset, that is specific to the selected
input.
oÉÅ~ää=mêÉëÉí
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Recall Preset to restore the saved pan and zoom “local”
preset from memory, and apply its settings to the selected input. A brief message is shown
on the display, indicating that the preset is being recalled.
oÉëÉí
On the Pan & Zoom menu, select Reset to restore pan and zoom settings to their default
values for the selected input. Pan H and Pan V values will be reset to 0; the Zoom value
will be reset to 100.
98 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=iba=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section
•LED Menu Tree
•LED Menu Description
iba=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
Press LED to access the LED Menu. The figure below illustrates the complete menu tree
— including sub-menus.
Figure 4-81. LED Menu Tree
LED
Menu
LED Control
LED Status
LED Contrast
LED Gamma
LED Info
LED Type
LED Test Pat
Tile Count
LED-PRO ID
LED Wall ID
Fiber Tx ID
Fiber Rx ID
Source
Type
LED OSD
Status
Type
Boost Mode
Creative Mode
Tile Mode
RS-232
Baud
Save Config
Reset Config
LED
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 99
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
iba=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The LED Menu allows you to adjust variety of parameters for the LED wall itself. Many
LED parameters are identical to those found in the Output Setup Menus within the Expert
Mode Menu — and placed here for your convenience.
A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-82. LED Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•LED Control
•LED Status
•LED Contrast
•LED Gamma
•LED Information
•LED Test Pattern
•LED OSD
•Boost Mode
•Creative Mode
•Tile Mode
•RS232
•Save Config
•Reset Config
LED
>LED Control Local
LED Status Enabled
LED Contrast 100%
LED Gamma Indoor 2
LED Information >>
LED Test Pattern >>
LED OSD >>
Boost Mode n/a
Creative Mode n/a
Tile Mode n/a
RS232 >>
Save Config
Reset Config
100 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
iba=`çåíêçä
From the LED Menu, select LED Control to choose whether the Barco LED wall is
controlled by LED-PRO or by an external application such as Director Toolset.
•When set to Remote, the Director Toolset GUI has full control of the serial port
and can communicate with LED-PRO and the LED Wall.
•When set to Local, LED-PRO is communicating with the LED wall, and any
commands from the GUI are ignored.
iba=pí~íìë
From the LED Menu, select LED Status to change the connected Barco LED Wall (and/or
Fiberlink) from “Standby” to “Enabled” mode.
•Selecting Standby powers down the LED wall.
•Selecting Enabled powers up the LED wall.
iba=`çåíê~ëí
From the LED Menu, select LED Contrast to adjust the overall contrast of the LED wall.
Please note:
•The selected value is not updated until SEL is pressed.
•This command is only applicable when LED Control is set to Local.
iba=d~ãã~
From the LED Menu, select LED Gamma to specify the Gamma curve associated with the
current output. There are several types of gamma curves selectable: Indoor1,Indoor2,
Outdoor1,Outdoor2 and Custom (if present). Please note:
•The selected Gamma is not updated until SEL is pressed.
•This command is only applicable when LED Control is set to Local.
Note LED-PRO, in local mode, is capable of setting up and
configuring an LED wall. However, custom gamma values
and wall calibration must be performed using Director Toolset.
Note When Standby mode is enabled, the connected Barco LED
wall will be non-responsive — and changes (or updates)
cannot be performed.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 101
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
iba=fåÑçêã~íáçå
From the LED Menu, select LED Information to display the LED Information Menu,
which displays data about the LED wall and fiber communications (if utilized). All menu
items are “read only,” and can not be adjusted.
Figure 4-83. LED Information Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function.
•LED Type
•Tile Count
•LED-PRO ID
•LED Wall ID
•Fiber Tx ID
•Fiber Rx ID
iba=qóéÉ
The LED Type field lists the type of Barco LED wall with which LED-PRO is currently
communicating. There are several types of LED walls available, and the product list is
updated regularly as new products become available.
qáäÉ=`çìåí
The Tile Count field lists the number of tiles detected.
ibaJmol=fa
The LED-PRO ID field lists the ID number of the LED-PRO, as assigned by the Director
Toolset. This value is almost always set to 1.
iba=t~ää=fa
The LED Wall ID field lists the ID number of the first Barco LED tile, as assigned by the
Director Toolset.
LED INFORMATION
>LED Type ILite 10MD
Tile Count 50
LED-PRO ID 0001
LEDWall ID 0002
Fiber Tx ID n/a
Fiber Rx ID n/a
Note The system ID is preset at the factory to 1, and can only be
changed with the Director Toolset. If you use Director
Toolset to change the ID, and then perform a factory reset on
LED-PRO or run the Setup Wizard, the ID returns to 1.
102 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
cáÄÉê=qñ=fa
The Fiber Tx field lists the ID of the Fiberlink Transmitter.
cáÄÉê=oñ=fa
The Fiber Rx field lists the ID of the Fiberlink Receiver.
iba=qÉëí=m~ííÉêå
From the LED Menu, select LED Test Pattern to display the Wall Test Pattern Menu.
This menu allows you to control test patterns that are programmed into the LED tiles
themselves.
Figure 4-84. Wall Test Pattern Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function.
•Source
•Type
pçìêÅÉ
The Source field enables you to set the LED test pattern mode. If status is n/a, ensure that
LED Control is set to Local:
•Internal — test patterns are controlled from within the tiles.
•External — LED-PRO controls the tiles.
qóéÉ
The Type field controls the type of LED test pattern, such as “Cycle” and individual full
screen colors.
iba=lpa
From the LED Menu, select LED OSD to display the Wall OSD Menu, which enables you
to control various on-screen LED displays. Note that the available displays vary between
Barco LED tiles.
Figure 4-85. Wall OSD Menu (sample)
WALL TEST PATTERN
>Source Internal
Type Cycle
WALL OSD
>Status On
Loop
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 103
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
Following are descriptions of each menu function.
•Status
•Type
pí~íìë
The Status field enables or disables the LED on-screen display.
qóéÉ
The Type field enables you to select various types of on-screen displays, such as mode,
tile number, temperature, etc.
_ççëí=jçÇÉ
On the LED Menu,the Boost Mode field allows you to enable or disable the boost mode.
When enabled, the upper end of the contrast range is boosted for a brighter LED display
(normally 5000 NIT, but 7000 NIT in boost mode). Please note:
•This mode is specific to OLite 510 tiles, and is not supported by other Barco tiles.
Future tiles may support this mode.
•In this mode, running the tiles brighter accelerates the “dimming” of the overall
LED capacity over time. Refer to the specific tile documentation for details.
`êÉ~íáîÉ=jçÇÉ
On the LED Menu, the Creative Mode field enables certain tiles (such as the OLite 510) to
switch between normal and creative modes.
•Normal mode is essentially LED operation within a standard rental structure.
•Creative mode describes non-standard setups, such as those created with
Director Toolset. Refer to the “Director Toolset User’s Guide” for additional
details on creative mode.
qáäÉ=jçÇÉ
On the LED Menu, the Tile Mode field enables you to select between two tile modes.
•In Real mode, each pixel output from LED-PRO is mapped directly to each LED
tile pixel.
•In Virtual tile mode, the LED tile’s resolution is essentially doubled. Each pixel
output from LED-PRO is mapped to four virtual 3xLED pixels within each 5xLED
pixel grouping.
104 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the LED Menu
opOPO
From the LED Menu, select RS232 to display the RS232 Menu, which enables you to set
the RS-232 baud rate for the Serial port — not the Diagnostic port. The Serial port is
used for communications with the Director Toolset.
Figure 4-86. RS232 Menu (sample)
•Select the Baud field to set the Serial port’s baud rate.
p~îÉ=`çåÑáÖ
On the LED Menu, select Save Config to save all current output configuration settings in
non-volatile memory.
oÉëÉí=`çåÑáÖ
On the LED Menu, select Reset Config to remove all user-entered configuration settings,
and restore the default values for the current output format.
RS232
>Baud 19200
Note This function is identical to the Save Config function located
in the Output Setup Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode >
Output). Refer to the “Save Config” section on page 84 for
instructions.
Note This function is identical to the Reset Config function located
in the Output Setup Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode >
Output). Refer to the “Reset Config” section on page 84 for
instructions.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 105
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=fåéìí=mçëáíáçå=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section
•Input Position Menu Tree
•Input Position Menu Description
fåéìí=mçëáíáçå=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
Press INPUT POS to access the Input Position Menu. The figure below illustrates the
complete menu tree — including sub-menus.
Figure 4-87. Input Position Menu Tree
Input Position
Menu
H Position
H Size
V Position
V Size
Save Cfg
Reset Config
Recall Config
Save Config
Recall Config
INPUT
POS
106 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
fåéìí=mçëáíáçå=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Input Position Menu allows you to perform an abbreviated set of input setup
functions, for operator convenience. For a complete set of input setup functions, use the
Input Setup Menu in the Expert Mode (SETUP > Expert Mode > Input). Refer to the
“Input” section on page 68 for details.
Please note:
•The menu enables you to set up all inputs, simply by pressing the desired button
in the front panel’s Inputs Section.
•Unlike the Input Setup Menu, the Input Position Menu does not display the
selected input on the top line. Use the physical button itself as the identifier.
A sample menu is shown below.
Figure 4-88. Input Position Menu (sample)
Following are descriptions of each menu function:
•H Position
•H Size
•V Position
•V Size
•Save Config
•Reset Config
•Recall Config
e=mçëáíáçå
On the Input Position Menu, select H Position to adjust (in pixels) the start of the input
video's active area from H sync.
e=páòÉ
On the Input Position Menu, select H Size to adjust (in pixels) the size of the active area.
INPUT POSITION
>H Position 296
H Size 1024
V Position 35
V Size 768
Save Config >>
Reset Config
Recall Config >>
Note As a recommendation, turn on the Output Raster Box when
making active area adjustments. The input should be aligned
with all four edges of the raster box. Refer to the “Raster
Box” section on page 94 for details.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 107
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
s=mçëáíáçå
On the Input Position Menu, select V Position to adjust (in lines) the start of the input
video's active area from V sync.
s=páòÉ
On the Input Position Menu, select V Size to adjust (in lines) the size of the active area.
p~îÉ=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Position Menu, select Save Config to display the Save Config As Menu,
which allows you to save and name up to 64 input configurations.
Figure 4-89. Save Config As Menu (sample)
Please note the following important points regarding input configurations:
•When you save input configuration parameters, they are stored in non-volatile
memory for each input source. If you do not save the parameters, the information
will not be restored upon the next system power up sequence.
•A filename may include up to 19 characters.
To save an input configuration:
1. Scroll to the filename field (e.g., File1) and press SEL. The navigation cursor (>)
changes to the edit cursor (#), allowing you to edit the first character.
2. Choose a character by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL. This
action also selects the next character for editing.
3. Repeat step 2 for all desired characters.
4. When data entry is complete, press SEL again. The filename will be truncated up
to the current character position.
SAVE CONFIG AS
>File1
Save Config
Note This function is the same as the Save Config function located
in the Input Setup Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode > Input).
It is also located here for operator convenience.
108 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
5. To save the input configuration under the selected filename, scroll to the Save
Config line and press SEL.
~If the selected filename has never been used, the message "Config
Saved" appears.
~If the filename is already in use, the Overwrite File Menu appears.
Figure 4-90. Overwrite File Menu (sample)
• Press SEL to overwrite the file.
• Press ESC to return to the Save Config As Menu, enabling
you to change the filename.
~If all 64 input configurations have been used, the “Library Full” message
appears. Press ESC, and then navigate to the Delete Config Menu,
which enables you to clear space for new configurations to be stored.
Refer to the “Delete Config” section on page 79 for details.
oÉëÉí=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Position Menu, select Reset Config to remove all user-entered
configuration settings from the current input. This action causes the system to restore the
parameters from the system’s internal “format library” for the current input format. If the
current format was derived as a best guess during the “auto-acquire” process (as shown
with asterisks), then those best guess values are restored.
Overwrite File1 ?
<SEL> = Yes
<ESC> = No
Important If you change a parameter on the Input Position Menu, but
you do not save the configuration (using the Save Config
function), the system does not prompt you to save. As an
important recommendation, always save your changes prior
to exiting the menu.
Note The Reset Config function can be performed prior to a “save”
if desired.
Note This function is the same as the Reset Config function
located in the Input Setup Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode >
Input). It is also located here for operator convenience.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 109
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
oÉÅ~ää=`çåÑáÖ
From the Input Position Menu, select Recall Config to display the Recall Config Menu,
which enables you to recall input configurations that were previously saved for the currently
selected input format and type.
Figure 4-91. Recall Config Menu (sample)
To recall an input configuration:
1. Scroll to the filename field (e.g., File1) and press SEL. The navigation cursor (>)
changes to the edit cursor (#), allowing you to browse the file list.
2. Choose a file by turning the knob, and “accept” it by pressing SEL.
3. Scroll to the Recall Config line and press SEL to recall the file.
RECALL CONFIG
>File1
Recall Config
Note This function is the same as the Recall Config function
located in the Input Setup Menu (SETUP > Expert Mode >
Input). It is also located here for operator convenience.
110 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
4. Operation
Using the Input Position Menu
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 111
RK==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides detailed instructions for upgrading LED-PRO system software. The
following topics are discussed:
•Software Upgrade Overview
•Hardware Requirements
•Software Requirements
•Downloading Software
•Serial Upgrade Method
112 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
5. Upgrading Software
Software Upgrade Overview
pçÑíï~êÉ=réÖê~ÇÉ=lîÉêîáÉï
Firmware files for the LED-PRO system are loaded into the hardware at power-up. These
files are stored in the unit’s onboard flash memory, which can be upgraded using a serial
connection to a PC (or laptop).
The PC connection is made through the Diagnostics port on LED-PRO’s rear panel, in
conjunction with the “Flash Loader” utility supplied with each upgrade. The Flash Loader
enables you to update the Flash memory with the latest software revision. The utility
should be run from a PC’s hard drive (recommended).
e~êÇï~êÉ=oÉèìáêÉãÉåíë
The following hardware items are required for upgrading LED-PRO software:
•IBM compatible computer with an available COM port.
•Serial cable conforming to EIA RS-232 specifications (e.g., standard modem
cable). The cable should have a DB-9 male connector on one end (for connection
to LED-PRO’s Diagnostic port), and the appropriate connector on the other end
for connection to your PC (typically, a DB-9).
pçÑíï~êÉ=oÉèìáêÉãÉåíë
The following list outlines software requirements for upgrading LED-PRO software:
•Ensure that your PC (or laptop) uses the Windows® 2000 or XP operating
systems.
•Software files:
~Flash File Loader. (This software enables the PC to send serial
commands to LED-PRO.)
~LED-PRO software
~What’s New File
Software files can be downloaded from either the Folsom FTP site or the Barco Folsom
website, as described in the following “Downloading Software” section.
Note One 15 meter RS-232 cable is provided with LED-PRO, with
DB-9 connectors at each end. Use this cable if compatible
with your PC’s COM port.
Note All software files listed above (and more) are contained in the
file that you will download.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 113
5. Upgrading Software
Downloading Software
açïåäç~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Two different methods can be used to download LED-PRO software and the Flash File
Loader utility:
•Via FTP Site
•Via Web Site
sá~=cqm=páíÉ
Barco Folsom's FTP site address is: ftp.folsom.com
To download from the FTP site:
1. Create a target folder on your PC (e.g., LED-PRO).
2. If you are using an FTP client, logon to our site as follows:
~User name: anonymous
~Password: your email address
SExample: johndoe@somecompany.com
If you are using a web browser to access our FTP site, point the browser to:
ftp://ftp.folsom.com
3. Once logged on, navigate to the following directory:
ftp://ftp.folsom.com/Products/Video/LEDPro/
4. Transfer the following file to the target folder on your PC:
LED-PRO_Rev#.##.exe
5. Please continue with the “Serial Upgrade Method” section on page 114.
sá~=tÉÄ=páíÉ
Barco Folsom's web site address is: http://www.folsom.com
To download from the web site:
1. Create a target folder on your PC (e.g., LED-PRO).
2. On the web, navigate to http://video.folsom.com.
3. Click “Downloads” to access the Downloads Page.
4. Using the “Select Video Product” pull-down menu, click LED-PRO.
5. In the “Software” section, click the Download button for the latest version of
system software.
6. When the File Download Dialog appears, click Save to save the file to your
computer.
7. When the Save As Dialog appears, navigate to the target folder and click Save.
8. Please continue with the “Serial Upgrade Method” section on page 114.
114 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
5. Upgrading Software
Serial Upgrade Method
pÉêá~ä=réÖê~ÇÉ=jÉíÜçÇ
Use the following steps to upgrade LED-PRO software using a serial connection to
your PC:
1. With the download complete, navigate to the target folder and double-click the
EXE to launch the installation shield.
2. Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package in the default folder. At the
conclusion of the procedure, a new path will be created under Start > Programs >
Barco Folsom, and shortcuts will be added.
3. Connect the Diagnostic port on the back of the LED-PRO to the COM 1 port on
your PC. In Chapter 2, refer to the “LED-PRO Rear Panel” section on page 15 for
the location of the Diagnostic port.
4. Power-up the LED-PRO.
5. On the PC, click Start > Programs > Barco Folsom > LED-PRO Rev #.## >
LED-PRO Flash File Loader Rev #.## to launch the Flash Loader utility, as
shown below.
Figure 5-1. Flash Loader Utility
6. Click Communication > RS232 Config > Baud, and select 38400.
7. Click Communication > RS232 Config > COM Port, and select the COM port on
your PC to which the LED-PRO is connected. If no other programs are using the
port, the “Established communications” message appears at the bottom of the
Flash Loader.
8. To verify communications between the PC and LED-PRO:
a. In the loader program, click in the black terminal window area.
b. Note the condition of the status lights:
•DCD and CTS should be red.
Note Do not move or copy any files out of the target folder.
Note If you have not used the COM 1 port on your PC, an error
message will be shown at the bottom of the Flash Loader.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 115
5. Upgrading Software
Serial Upgrade Method
•TXD and RXD should be green. They will flash if Enter is
pressed.
Figure 5-2. Flash Loader Status Lights, Normal Condition
c. Press Enter a few times to display the system prompt “#” on screen.
d. If the prompt does not appear, continue with step 9 (troubleshooting).
e. If the prompt appears, continue with step 10 (uploading files).
9. To troubleshoot the serial connection:
a. If the DCD and CTS status lights are green, re-check the communication
settings in the loader, and verify that the COM port and Baud Rate
settings are correct.
b. To verify LED-PRO communication settings, on the front panel of the
LED-PRO unit, press SETUP to display the Setup Menu.
c. On the Setup Menu, navigate to the Diagnostic RS232 Menu by
selecting Expert Mode > System > Diagnostic RS232.
Figure 5-3. Diagnostic RS232 Menu (sample)
d. On the menu, ensure that the following settings are selected:
•Baud Rate = 38400
•Parameters = N81
•Handshaking = On
e. Repeat steps 7 and 8 above, then re-check the status lights.
f. With communication status OK, continue with step 10.
10. To upload files to LED-PRO, click "Open script file to read and upload."
11. In the dialog, select "Upload_All.sld" and click Open. The LED-PRO unit should
immediately display the "System in LOADER MODE" message.
12. It takes several minutes to load the flash memory. When complete, the Flash
Loader utility displays the “Upload Complete” message. Click OK to continue.
13. Cycle power on the LED-PRO unit, and exit the Flash Loader utility.
DIAGNOSTIC RS232
>Baud 38400
Parameters N81
Handshaking On
Reset
116 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
5. Upgrading Software
Serial Upgrade Method
14. On LED-PRO, perform a factory reset. Press SETUP, select Factory Reset, and
then confirm. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Factory Reset” section on page 52 for
additional details.
15. On LED-PRO, verify that the new software has been loaded correctly. Press
SETUP, then navigate to the Software Version Menu by selecting Expert Mode
> Software Version.
Figure 5-4. Software Version Menu
This completes the software upgrade procedure.
Warning Use caution when performing this step, as all saved files will
be erased.
SOFTWARE VERSION
Version 2.00
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 117
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
This appendix provides detailed technical specifications for the LED-PRO. The following
topics are discussed:
•Input Specifications
•Output Specifications
•User Control Specifications
•Physical and Electrical Specifications
•Communications Specifications
•Agency Specifications
•Pinouts
118 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input Specifications
fåéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists LED-PRO input specifications.
* All buffered loop-through connectors, 75 Ohm output impedance
Table A-1. LED-PRO Input Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
Video Input Universal Inputs (3) high bandwidth video channels support:
•RGBHV
•RGBS
•RGsB computer video
•Component video (STD or HDTV)
•S-video
•Composite video
Input 1 (1) DVI-I connector, with buffered loop-through. Supports
both universal analog and DVI *
Input 2 (1) 15-pin HD connectors, with buffered loop-through *
Input 3 (5) BNC connectors, each with buffered loop-through *
Serial Digital Video Input (1) BNC connector, SDI/HDSDI
Input Resolution Range Resolutions:
•VGA (640x480)
•SVGA (800x600)
•XGA (1024x768)
•SXGA (1280x1204)
•UXGA (1600x1200)
HDTV:
•480p
•720p
•1080p
•1080i
Standard Resolution Video Input NTSC, PAL or SECAM
Horizontal Frequency 15 kHz to 120 kHz
Vertical Frequency 20 Hz to 120 Hz
Input Termination 75 Ohm
Input Sync Sync-on-Video, Separate C or H/V
Genlock Input V lock / HV lock. System genlocks to selected input
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 119
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Output Specifications
lìíéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
The table below lists LED-PRO output specifications.
rëÉê=`çåíêçä=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
The table below lists LED-PRO user control specifications.
mÜóëáÅ~ä=~åÇ=bäÉÅíêáÅ~ä=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists LED-PRO physical and electrical specifications.
Table A-2. LED-PRO Output Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
Video Output Digital Video Output Proprietary Barco LED wall interface via DVI-I connector
Output Resolution SVGA (800x600), 480,000 total pixels @ 32Mhz pixel clock
Table A-3. LED-PRO User Control Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
User Control Local control User-friendly front panel interface, dedicated menus and buttons
Setup Local (manual or via Setup Wizard), or via Director Toolset
Calibration Via Director Toolset
Remote control Computer or third party control via RS-232 or Ethernet
Table A-4. LED-PRO Physical and Electrical Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
Power Connector Standard IEC, integral on/off switch
Power 47-63 Hz, 100-240 VAC
Mechanical Chassis H: 3.50 inches (8.89 cm)
W: 17.00 inches (43.18 cm)
W: 19.00 inches (48.26 cm) with rackmount wings
D: 15.00 inches (38.10 cm)
Temperature 0-40 degrees C
Humidity 0-95% non-condensing
120 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Communications Specifications
`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists LED-PRO communications specifications.
* 115k Baud recommended for LED tile firmware upload only.
* 19.2k Baud recommended for normal operation, such as Director Toolset.
^ÖÉåÅó=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists LED-PRO agency specifications.
Mounting 2 RU rack mount
Weight 17.5 lbs (7.93 kg)
Shipping Weight 20 lbs (9.07 kg)
Table A-4. LED-PRO Physical and Electrical Specifications (Continued)
Parameter Detail Specification
Table A-5. LED-PRO Communications Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
Communications RS-232 DB-9 Female, DCE, 115k Baud *
Ethernet RJ-45, 10/100 Mbps Autosense
Table A-6. LED-PRO Agency Specifications
Parameter Detail Specification
Agency Specifications EMI/EMC EN55103-1 E4, EN55103-2, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Safety EN 60950 Class 1
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 121
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
máåçìíë=
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•Analog 15-pin D Connector
•DVI-I Connector Pinouts
•Ethernet Connector
•Serial and Diagnostic Connector
^å~äçÖ=NRJéáå=a=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the analog 15-pin D connector:
Figure A-1. Analog 15-pin D Connector, chassis view
The table below lists Analog 15-pin D connector pinouts.
Table A-7. Analog 15-pin D Connector Pinouts
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1Red 9
2 Green 10 GND
3Blue 11
412
5 13 H Sync or C Sync
6 Red return 14 V Sync
7 Green return 15
8Blue return
10 6
51
15 11
122 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
asfJf=`çååÉÅíçê=máåçìíë
The figure below illustrates the DVI-I connector:
Figure A-2. DVI-I Connector
The table below lists DVI-I Connector pinouts. Please note:
•T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal
•DDC = Display Data Channel
Table A-8. DVI-I Connector Pinouts
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 T.M.D.S. Data 2- 13 T.M.D.S. Data 3+
2 T.M.D.S. Data 2+ 14 +5V Power
3 T.M.D.S. Data 2/4 Shield 15 ground (for +5V)
4 T.M.D.S. Data 4- 16 Hot Plug Detect
5 T.M.D.S. Data 4+ 17 T.M.D.S. Data 0-
6 DDC Clock 18 T.M.D.S. Data 0+
7 DDC Data 19 T.M.D.S. Data 0/5 Shield
8 Analog Vertical Sync 20 T.M.D.S. Data 5-
9 T.M.D.S. Data 1- 21 T.M.D.S. Data 5+
10 T.M.D.S. Data 1+ 22 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
11 T.M.D.S. Data 1/3 Shield 23 T.M.D.S. Clock +
12 T.M.D.S. Data 3- 24 T.M.D.S. Clock -
MicroCross Pins
C1 Analog Red Video C4 Analog Horizontal Sync
C2 Analog Green Video C5 Analog Common Ground Return
C3 Analog Blue Video
1 8
9
17 24
C1 C2
C3 C4
C5
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 123
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
bíÜÉêåÉí=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the Ethernet connector:
Figure A-3. Ethernet Connector
The table below lists Ethernet connector pinouts.
Table A-9. Ethernet Connector Pinouts
Pin Signal Wire Color
1 TX Data + White / Orange
2 TX Data - Orange
3 RX Data + White / Green
4Blue
5 White / Blue
6 RX Data - Green
7 White / Brown
8Brown
18
124 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
pÉêá~ä=~åÇ=aá~ÖåçëíáÅ=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the Serial and Diagnostic connector:
Figure A-4. Serial and Diagnostic Connector
The table below lists Serial and Diagnostic connector pinouts.
Table A-10. Serial and Diagnostic Connector Pinouts
Pin RS-232 Signal Description
1 CD Carrier Detect
2 RXD Received Data
3 TXD Transmitted Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request To Send
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Unused
51
96
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 125
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
This appendix provides information regarding external remote control protocol. The
following topics are discussed:
•Default Serial Parameters
•Default IP Address
•RS-232 Mode
•LED-PRO Remote Commands
126 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
Default Serial Parameters
aÉÑ~ìäí=pÉêá~ä=m~ê~ãÉíÉêë
Default serial communications parameters are provided for the following two ports:
•Diagnostics Port
•RS-232 Port
Please note:
•The system returns to these values after a factory reset.
•These settings can be changed using the menu system.
~In Chapter 4, refer to the “Diagnostic RS232” section on page 88 for
instructions on changing Diagnostic Port settings.
~In Chapter 4, refer to the “RS232” section on page 51 for instructions on
changing the RS-232 port settings.
aá~ÖåçëíáÅë=mçêí
Following are the default serial communications settings for the Diagnostics port, which is
used for diagnostics, software upgrades and serial commands (e.g., via HyperTerminal).
•Baud Rate = 38.4K baud
•Parity = NONE
•Stop Bit = 1
•Data Bit = 8
•Echo = ON
•Flow Control = NONE
opJOPO=mçêí
Following are the default serial communications settings for the RS-232 port, which is used
to communicate with the Director Toolset.
•Baud Rate = 19.2K baud
•Parity = NONE
•Stop Bit = 1
•Data Bit = 8
•Echo = ON
•Flow Control = NONE
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 127
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
Default IP Address
aÉÑ~ìäí=fm=^ÇÇêÉëë
The LED-PRO default IP address is 192.168.000.200.
Please note:
•The system returns to this value after a factory reset.
•This default address can be changed using the menu system. In Chapter 4, refer
to the “Ethernet” section on page 89 for instructions.
opJOPO=jçÇÉ
The LED-PRO will respond with a “#” prompt when the command processor is ready for a
command. The command syntax is shown below
cmd arg1 arg2 … argn<CR>
Please note:
•A space (ASCII 32) must be inserted between the command and any arguments
that follow. A space must also be inserted between all argument parameters,
except for the last argument in the chain.
•All commands in RS-232 mode must be terminated with a carriage return (ASCII
13). The carriage return will tell the command processor to begin execution of the
command.
•Query commands will return the following:
=result
#
The “=” indicates that a result from a query command is following. The “result” will
follow directly after the “=”. The value of the result will vary depending on the
query command used. A new line will be generated and the prompt (#) will
indicate the system is ready for a new command.
Table B-1. RS-232 Command Syntax
Command Description
cmd Any valid graphics board command, typically 2 to 6 alphabetic (non numeric)
characters
arg argument1, argument2, … argument"N" are required or optional parameters
depending on the command used.
<CR> carriage return (ASCII 13) terminates the command
128 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
ibaJmol=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The tables below list LED-PRO remote commands. Click the hyperlink for detailed
descriptions and examples, or go directly to the page as listed. All remote commands are
sorted by category.
•Resolution Remote Commands
•Input Remote Commands
•Output Remote Commands
•Custom Format Remote Commands
•System and Ethernet Remote Commands
•Logo Remote Commands
•Effects Related Commands
•LED-PRO Serial Command Descriptions
oÉëçäìíáçå=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO resolution remote commands.
fåéìí=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO input remote commands.
Table B-2. LED-PRO Resolution Remote Commands
Command Description Page
RESH Query list of available Resolutions 135
RESI nn Set current Input Resolution 135
RESI? in Query Input Resolution 135
Table B-3. LED-PRO Input Remote Commands
Command Description Page
ACQ mode Disable/Enable Auto acquisition mode 135
ACQ? Query Auto acquisition mode 135
DINT in mode Sets De-interlacer mode 135
DINT? in Query De-interlacer mode 135
PCOMP in mode Set Pulldown Compensation mode 136
PCOMP? in Query Pulldown Compensation mode 136
FREEZ mode Enables/disables freeze 136
FREEZ? Query freeze mode 136
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 129
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
IAR in n cn Adjust Input Aspect Ratio 136
IAR? in Query Input Aspect Ratio 136
IAUTOC Automatically Configure the Input 137
IBRT in nnn.n Set Input Brightness 137
IBRT? in Query Input Brightness 137
ICNT in nnn.n Set Input Contrast 137
ICNT? in Query Input Contrast 137
ICPHO in nn Set Input Sample Phase 137
ICPHO? in Query Input Sample Phase 138
ICLIST List all saved Input Configurations 138
ICDEL filename Delete saved Input Configuration 138
ICREC in filename Recall saved Input Configuration 138
ICRST in Reset Input Configuration 138
ICSAV in filename Saves Input Configuration 138
ICSP in mode Set Input Colorspace 139
ICSP? in Query Input Colorspace 139
ICUSE in Query Input Configuration Name used for a channel 139
IEDGE in edge nnnn Adjust top/bottom/left or right edge in Oversample mode 139
IEDGE? in edge Query Input Video edge adjustment 139
IGM in n Sets Input Gamma 139
IGM? in Query Input Gamma for a channel 140
IHATV nnnn Set Input Horiz Active 140
IHATV? in Query Input Horiz Active 140
IHPOS nnnn Set Input Horiz Position 140
IHPOS? in Query Input Horiz Position 140
IHTOTAL nnnn Set Input Horiz Total 140
IHTOTAL? in Query Input Horiz Total 141
IHUE in nnn Adjust Input Hue 141
IHUE? in Query Input Hue 141
ILB in mode Set LetterBox mode 141
ILB? in Query LetterBox mode 141
IRBRT in c nn.n Set RGB Input Brightness 141
IRBRT? in c Query RGB Input Brightness 142
Table B-3. LED-PRO Input Remote Commands (Continued)
Command Description Page
130 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
IRCNT in c nnn.n Set RGB Input Contrast 142
IRCNT? in c Query RGB Input Contrast 142
ISAT in nnn Adjust Input Saturation 142
ISAT? in Query Input Saturation 142
ISMP in n Adjust Input Sample mode 142
ISMP? in Query Input Sample mode 143
ISYNC in mode Set Input Sync 143
ISYNC? in Query Input Sync 143
ISYNCSLICE in nnn Set Input Sync Slice Threshold 143
ISYNCSLICE? in Query Input Sync Slice Threshold 143
ITYPE in mode Set Input Type 143
ITYPE? in Query Input Type 144
IVATV nnnn Set Input Vert Active 144
IVATV? Query Input Vert Active 144
IVPOS nnnn Set Input Vert Position 144
IVPOS? Query Input Vert Position 144
IVTOTAL? Query Input Vert Total 144
IVREC in Input Channel View Recall 144
IVSAV in Input Channel View Save 145
LCK? in Query Lock status 145
RTE in Routes Input source 145
RTE? Query currently routed Input source 145
ICLIP Input clip to black 145
ILUMA Input Luma Tracking 145
ISHRP Input sharpness 145
Table B-3. LED-PRO Input Remote Commands (Continued)
Command Description Page
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 131
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
lìíéìí=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO output remote commands.
Table B-4. LED-PRO Output Remote Commands
Command Description Page
LCKMODE mode type Set Lock To Source Mode and Type 145
LCKMODE? Query Lock To Source Mode and Type 146
LCKPHASE h Sets Lock To Source Horizontal Phase 146
OCNT nnn Adjust Output Contrast 146
OCNT? Query Output Contrast 146
OCRST Reset Output Configuration 146
OCSAV Save Output Configuration 146
OGM mode Set Output Gamma 147
OGM? Query Output Gamma 147
OHATV nnnn Set Output Horiz Active 147
OHATV? Query Output Horiz Active 147
OHPOS nnnn Set Output Horiz Position 147
OHPOS? Query Output Horiz Position 147
OHSYNC nnnn Set Output Horiz Sync 147
OHSYNC? Query Output Horiz Sync 148
OHTOTAL nnnn Set Output Horiz Total 148
OHTOTAL? Query Output Horiz Total 148
OTPM type raster Enables/disables Output test pattern and raster box 148
OTPM? Query Output test pattern and raster box mode 148
OVATV nnnn Set Output Vert Active 148
OVATV? Query Output Vert Active 149
OVPOS nnnn Set Output Vert Position 149
OVPOS? Query Output Vert Position 149
OVSYNC nnnn Set Output Vert Sync 149
OVSYNC? Query Output Vert Sync 149
OVTOTAL nnnn Set Output Vert Total 149
OVTOTAL? Query Output Vert Total 149
132 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
`ìëíçã=cçêã~í=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO custom format remote commands.
Table B-5. LED-PRO Custom Format Remote Commands
Command Description Page
EFLIST List all saved custom formats 150
EFRES nn Set base resolution for custom format settings 150
EFRES? Query base resolution for custom format settings 150
EFRESH Query list of available Resolutions for custom format 150
EFINT mode Set custom format to be non-interlaced or interlaced 150
EFINT? Query the interlace mode for the custom format 150
EFHTOTAL nnnn Set Horiz Total for custom format 150
EFHTOTAL? Query Horiz Total for custom format 151
EFHATV nnnn Set Horiz Active for custom format 151
EFHATV? Query Horiz Active for custom format 151
EFHFP nn Set Horiz Front Porch for custom format 151
EFHFP? Query Horiz Front Porch for custom format 151
EFHSYNC nn Set Horiz Sync for custom format 151
EFHSYNC? Query Horiz Sync for custom format 151
EFHRATE? Query Horiz Rate for custom format 151
EFVTOTAL nnnn Set Vert Total for custom format 152
EFVTOTAL? Query Vert Total for custom format 152
EFVATV nnnn Set Vert Active for custom format 152
EFVATV? Query Vert Active for custom format 152
EFVFP nn Set Vert Front Porch for custom format 152
EFVFP? Query Vert Front Porch for custom format 152
EFVSYNC nn Set Vert Sync for custom format 152
EFVSYNC? Query Vert Sync for custom format 152
EFVRATE nnn.n Query Vert Rate for custom format 153
EFVRATE? Query Vert Rate for custom format 153
EFSAV Save custom format 153
EFDEL Delete saved custom format 153
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 133
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
póëíÉã=~åÇ=bíÜÉêåÉí=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO system and Ethernet remote commands.
içÖç=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO Logo remote commands.
Table B-6. LED-PRO System and Ethernet Remote Commands
Command Description Page
DMSG mode Disable/Enable Debug messages 153
DMSG? Query Debug message mode 153
ENETM Set Ethernet Mode 153
EDHCP Set Ethernet DHCP mode 154
EDHCP? Query Ethernet DHCP mode 154
EECHO mode Disable/Enable echo on Ethernet telnet window 154
EIP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz
Sets Ethernet IP address, Subnet mask, default Gateway IP 154
EIP? Query Ethernet IP address 154
EMAC? Query Ethernet MAC address 154
SBAUD n Adjust Serial Baud Rate 155
SBAUD? Query Serial Baud Rate 155
SYSAV Save System State 155
HELP [op] Displays command list: op [A..Z] 155
LOADR Run Loader Program 155
RESET Factory Reset LED-PRO 155
WALLSTANDBY Set LED Wall to standby mode 155
MINMODE Set Minimum Delay Mode 156
MINSTAT Query Minimum Delay Status 156
LOCKOUT Locks or unlocks the front panel 156
Table B-7. LED-PRO Logo Remote Commands
Command Description Page
LOGOD Delete currently saved Logo image from Flash 156
LOGOL Load currently saved Logo from Flash to Frame store buffer 156
LOGOS Save current output image as Logo image to Flash 156
LOGOI Query Logo resolution 156
134 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
bÑÑÉÅíë=oÉä~íÉÇ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO effects related commands.
m~åLwççãLsáÉï=oÉãçíÉ=`çãã~åÇë
The table below lists LED-PRO pan/zoom/view remote commands.
Table B-8. LED-PRO Effects Related Commands
Command Description Page
TRN type n Selects transition type and time 156
TRN? Query transition type and time 157
Table B-9. LED-PRO Pan/Zoom/View Remote Commands
Command Description Page
PANH nnn.n Set Output Horizontal Pan 157
PANH? Query Output Horizontal Pan Setting 157
PANV nnn.n Set Output Vertical Pan 157
PANV? Query Output Vertical Pan Setting 157
VIEW? nn Query View settings 157
VIEWD nn Delete View 158
VIEWR nn Recall View 158
VIEWS nn Save View 158
VIEWI? in Query Input channel View settings 158
VIEWIR Recall current Input channel View 158
VIEWIS in Save Input channel View 158
ZOOM nnn.n Selects zoom factor 159
ZOOM? Query zoom factor 159
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 135
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
ibaJmol=pÉêá~ä=`çãã~åÇ=aÉëÅêáéíáçåë
obpe
•Description: Query the available resolution list for the LED-PRO.
•Parameters: None
•Returns: All available resolutions in the format:
n : HxV @F (example: 20 : 1024x768 @59.94)
SRESH (Query all available resolutions)
obpf=åå
•Description: Set current channel's Input Resolution. If Auto Acquire is on,
setting Input resolution with this command may be overridden.
•Parameters:nn - Input Resolution (use RESH command for resolution list)
•Query:
RESI? in
Returns the Input Resolution for the specified channel in the format
= nn
SRESI 1 (Set Input Resolution of currently selected input channel to resolution
index 1 (NTSC(480i))
SRESI? 1 (Queries Input Resolution for channel 1)
^`n=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Turns Auto acquisition mode off/on.
•Parameters:mode [0 | 1] Off | On
•Query:
ACQ?
Returns Auto acquisition mode in the format
= mode
SACQ 0 (Turns auto acquisition mode off)
SACQ? (Queries for auto acquisition mode)
afkq=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Sets De-interlacer mode. Motion de-interlacer mode is only
available for Interlaced inputs
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
mode - De-interlacer mode [0-1] Motion | Fld->Frm
•Query:
DINT? in
136 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
Returns De-interlacer mode in the format
= mode
SDINT 1 1 (Set De-interlacer mode to Fld->Frm)
SDINT? 1 (Queries De-interlacer mode for channel 1)
m`ljm=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Sets the de-interlacer's Pulldown Compensation mode.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
mode - [0 | 1] Disable | Enable
•Query:
PCOMP? in
Returns the de-interlacer's Pulldown Compensation mode in the format
= mode
SPCOMP 1 0 (Disables Pulldown Compensation mode for channel 1.)
SPCOMP? 2 (Queries Pulldown Compensation mode of channel 2.)
cobbw=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Enables/disables output Freeze
•Parameters:mode - [0 | 1] Disable | Enable
•Query:
FREEZ?
Returns the Freeze mode in the format
= mode
SFREEZ 1 (Freezes Image)
SFREEZ? (Queries Freeze mode)
f^o=áå=å=Åå
•Description: Adjust Input Aspect Ratio.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
n - Input Aspect Ratio: n[0-5], 1:1 | 3:2 | 4:3 | 5:4 | 16:9 | Custom
cn - (Optional) Custom Input Aspect Ratio: (0.75 - 3.00)
•Query:
IAR? in
Note cn parameter is not required unless user selects Custom
Input Aspect Ratio (i.e. n = 5)
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 137
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
Returns the Input Aspect Ratio of specified source in the format
= n cn
SAR 1 5 2.0 (Sets aspect ratio of channel 1 to Custom and sets the custom
aspect ratio to 2.0)
SAR? 1 (Queries Input aspect ratio of channel 1)
f^rql`
•Description: Auto Configure currently routed input. Only available if Input
Sample mode is 1:1
•Parameters: None
SIAUTOC (Auto Configures current input source)
f_oq=áå=åååKå
•Description: Adjusts the Input Brightness value of the specified source.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
nnn.n - Brightness value; Range 75 to 125%
•Query:
IBRT? in
Returns the Input Brightness value of the specified source in the format
= nnn.n
SBRT 2 110 (Adjusts input 2 Brightness to be 110%.)
SBRT? 2 (Queries Input Brightness of channel 2.)
f`kq=áå=åååKå
•Description: Adjusts the Input Contrast values of the specified source.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
nnn.n - Contrast value; Range 75 - 125%
•Query:
ICNT? in
Returns the Input Contrast values of the specified source in the format
= nnn.n
SCNT 1 100 (Adjusts input 1 Contrast to be 100%.)
SCNT? 1 (Queries Input Contrast of channel 1.)
f`mel=áå=åå
•Description: Adjusts the Input Clock Phase Offset.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
nn - Phase value; [-16..15]
138 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
ICPHO? in
Returns the Input Clock Phase Offset in the format
= nn
SCPHO 1 15 (Adjusts Input clock phase offset manually to 15 on input 1.)
SCPHO? 1 (Queries the Input clock phase offset of channel 1.)
f`ifpq
•Description: Lists the names of all saved Input configurations.
•Parameters: None
•Returns: List the names of saved Input configurations, one name per line.
SICLIST (Lists all saved Input configurations.)
f`abi=ÑáäÉå~ãÉ=
•Description: Delete saved Input configuration.
•Parameters:filename - name of configuration to be deleted (not case sensitive).
SICDEL file1 (Deletes Input configuration stored as FILE1.)
f`ob`=áå=ÑáäÉå~ãÉ
•Description: Recalls saved Input Configuration.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
filename - configuration that is being recalled (not case sensitive).
SICREC 3 file1 (Recalls Input configuration stored as file1 for channel 3.)
f`opq=áå
•Description: Reset Input Configuration for the specified channel.
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
SICRST 1 (Resets Input Configuration for channel 1)
f`p^s=áå=ÑáäÉå~ãÉ
•Description: Saves Input configuration to non-volatile memory.
•Parameters:
filename - name given to configuration when it is stored. This filename is
translated to all upper case characters. If same input configuration name
exist, it will be overwritten.
in - Input chnl [1-4]
SICSAV 3 file1 (saves Input configuration as FILE1 for channel 3.)
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 139
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
f`pm=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Sets Input Colorspace for the selected input channel. SMPTE,
BETA, and M-II colorspace available only if input type is YPbPr
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
mode - [0-3] RGB | SMPTE | BETA | M-II
•Query:
ICSP? in
Returns the Input Colorspace for the specified input channel in the format
= mode
SICSP 1 2 (Sets YPbPr input colorspace to Beta for channel 1)
SICSP? 2 (Queries channel 2 for Input Colorspace.)
f`rpb=áå
•Description: Query Input configuration name used for specified channel.
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
•Returns: Name of the Input configuration used (if any)
SICUSE 1 (Lists names of saved input configurations used by channel 1.)
fbadb=áå=ÉÇÖÉ=åååå
•Description: Set Input Edge in oversample mode. The minimum and maximum
limit is dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
edge (L|R|T|B)
nnnn - Input edge: nnnn
if edge=L [Input H Sync-( Input H Sync + (Input H total X 0.25))]
if edge=R [((H Total - H Front Porch))X0.9 -(H total)]
if edge= T [ Vsync - (Vsync +128)]
if edge= B [ (V total -64) - Vtotal)]
•Query:
IEDGE? in edge
Returns the Input Edge value in the format
= nnnn
SIEDGE 1 R 1024 (Set Input Right Edge to 1024)
SIEDGE? 1 L (Queries Input Left Edge value)
fdj=áå=å
•Description: Sets Input Gamma for the selected input channel
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
n - [1.0-3.0] increment 0.1
140 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
IGM? in
Returns the Input Gamma for the specified input channel in the format
= n
SIGM 1 2.2 (Set Input gamma value to 2.2 for channel 1)
SIGM? 2 (Queries channel 2's Input gamma value.)
fe^qs=åååå
•Description: Set Input Horizontal Active. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
nnnn - Input Horizontal Active: nnnn[(Actual Input H Active * 2/10,
minimum of 150) - +(Actual Input H Active * 6/5, maximum of Input H
Total - Input H Sync)]
•Query:
IHATV? in
Returns the Input Horizontal Active in the format
= nnnn
SIHATV 1 1024 (Set Input Horizontal Active for channel 1 to 1024)
SIHATV? 1 (Queries Input Horizontal Active for channel 1)
femlp=åååå
•Description: Set Input Horizontal Position. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
nnnn - Input Horizontal Position: nnnn[(Input H Sync) - +(H Total - H
Active)]
•Query:
IHPOS? in
Returns the Input Horizontal Position in the format
= nnnn
SIHPOS 1 296 (Set Input Horizontal Position for channel 1 to 296)
SIHPOS? 1 (Queries Input Horizontal Position for channel 1)
feqlq^i=åååå
•Description: Set Input Horizontal Total. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 141
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
nnnn - Input Horizontal Total: nnnn[(Actual Input H Total * 2/5) - +(Actual
Input H Total * 9/5)]
•Query:
IHTOTAL? in
Returns the Input Horizontal Total in the format
= nnnn
SIHTOTAL 1 1344 (Set Input Horizontal Total for channel 1 to 1344)
SIHTOTAL? 1 (Queries Input Horizontal Total for channel 1)
ferb=áå=ååå
•Description: Adjusts Input Hue. Only applicable for non RGB source.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
nnn - Input Hue (-180 - +180)
•Query:
IHUE? in
Returns the Input Hue in the format
= nnn
SIHUE 1 170 (Adjusts input hue of channel 1 to 170)
SIHUE? 1 (Queries Input Hue of channel 1)
fi_=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: LetterBox Mode
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
mode - Disable/Enable letterbox mode (0 / 1)
•Query:
ILB? in
Returns the LetterBox Mode in the format
= mode
SILB 1 1 (Enables Letterbox mode of channel 1)
SILB? 1 (Queries LetterBox mode of channel 1)
fo_oq=áå=Å=ååKå
•Description: Adjusts the Input RGB Brightness value.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
c - Color [R|G|B]
nnn.n - Brightness value; Range -25% to +25%
142 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
IRBRT? in c
Returns the Input RGB Brightness value of the specified source in the format
= nnn.n
SIRBRT 1 R 10 (Adjusts input 1 Red Brightness to be +10%.)
SIRBRT? 1 R (Queries input Red Brightness of channel 1.)
fo`kq=áå=Å=åååKå==
•Description: Adjusts the Input RGB Contrast values.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
c - Color [R|G|B]
nnn.n - Contrast value; Range -25% to +25%
•Query:
IRCNT? in c
Returns the Input RGB Contrast values of the specified source in the format
= nnn.n
SIRCNT 1 B -15 (Adjusts input 1 Blue Contrast to be -15%.)
SIRCNT? 1 B (Queries input Blue Contrast of Channel 1.)
fp^q=áå=ååå
•Description: Adjust Input Saturation.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-4]
nnn - Input Saturation (75 - 125 if input is YPbPr, 0 - 150 otherwise)
•Query:
ISAT? in
Returns the Input Saturation in the format
= nnn
SISAT 1 100 (Adjusts Input Saturation of channel 1 to 100)
SISAT? 1 (Queries Input Saturation of channel 1)
fpjm=áå=å
•Description: Adjust Input Sample Mode.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl (1-3)
n - Input Sample Mode: n[0-1], Oversample | 1:1
Note Some input's sample mode can only be set to oversample,
some can only be set to 1:1.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 143
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
ISMP? in
Returns the Input Sample Mode in the format
= n
SISMP 1 0 (Adjusts Input Sample mode of channel 1 to OverSample)
SISMP? 1 (Queries Input Sample Mode of channel 1)
fpvk`=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Adjusts the Input Sync selection.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
mode - Mode [0|1|2|3], Auto|H/V|CSync|SOG
•Query:
ISYNC? in
Returns the Input Sync selected for the specified input channel in the format
= mode
SISYNC 1 1 (Sets Scaler to expect H/V sync on input channel 1.)
SISYNC? 1 (Queries Input Sync selected for channel 1)
fpvk`pif`b=áå=ååå
•Description: Adjusts the Input Sync Slice Threshold selection.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
nnn - Sync Slice Threshold [20 - 280mV (in steps of 10)]
•Query:
ISYNCSLICE? in
Returns the Input Sync Slice Threshold selected for the specified input channel in
the format
= nnn
SISYNCSLICE 1 60 (Sets Sync Slicer threshold to 60mV for channel 1.)
SISYNCSLICE? 1 (Queries Input Sync Slicer threshold for channel 1)
fqvmb=áå=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Sets the Input Type. Note: If Auto Acquire is On, setting Input type
with this command may be overridden. Input Type DVI is only available on input
channel 1.
•Parameters:
in - Input chnl [1-3]
mode - Mode [0|1|2|3], RGB | YPbPr | NTSC/PAL/SECAM | DVI (DVI
available only on chnl 1)
144 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
ITYPE? in
Returns the Input Type selected for the specified input channel in the format
= mode
SITYPE 1 2 (Sets Input type to YPbPr on input channel 1.)
SITYPE? 1 (Queries Input type for channel 1)
fs^qs=åååå
•Description: Set Input Vertical Active. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Input Vertical Active: nnnn[(Actual Input V Active * 2/10,
absolute minimum of 150) - + (Actual Input V Active *6/5, absolute maximum of
Input V Total - Input V Sync)]
•Query:
IVATV?
Returns the Input's Vertical Active value in the format
= nnnn
SIVATV 768 (Set Input Vertical Active to 768)
SIVATV? (Queries Input Vertical Active)
fsmlp=åååå
•Description: Set Input Vertical Position. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the input resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Input Vertical Position: nnnn[(Input V Sync) - + (Input V Total
- Input V Active)]
•Query:
IVPOS?
Returns the Input's Vertical Position value in the format
= nnnn
SIVPOS 35 (Set Input Vertical Position to 35)
SIVPOS? (Queries Input Vertical Position)
fsqlq^i\
•Description: Query Input Vertical Total.
•Parameters: None
•Returns: nnnn - Input Vertical Total
SIVTOTAL? (Queries Input Vertical Total)
fsob`=áå
•Description: Input Channel View (Preset) Recall
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 145
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
SIVREC 1 (Recalls Input Channel View of channel 1)
fsp^s=áå
•Description: Input Channel View (Preset) Save
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
SIVSAV 1 (Saves the Input Channel View for channel 1)
i`h\=áå
•Description: Queries Lock Status for specified input channel.
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
•Returns: n - Lock Status (0 - 3) Not Locked | Locked (Match Format) | Locked
(Best Guessed) | Locked (using saved Input Configuration)
SLCK? 1 (Queries Lock status for channel 1)
oqb=áå
•Description: Selects and routes input to be processed.
•Parameters: in - Input [1-5] 1,2,3, 4=SDI, 5=Black or Logo
•Query:
RTE?
Returns the input channel that is routed in the format
= in
SRTE 2 (Selects input 2 for processing.)
SRTE? (Queries the input channel that is routed.)
f`ifm
•Description: Input Clip to Black
•Usage: ICLIP nnn (Input Clip Level -15 - 0)
firj^
•Description: Input Luma Tracking
•Usage: ILUMA nnn (Input Luma Track Level -15 - 0)
fpeom
•Description: Input Sharpness
•Usage: ISHRP n[-10 - +10]
i`hjlab=ãçÇÉ=íóéÉ
•Description: Sets Lock To Source Mode and Type
•Parameters:
src [0-1], Disable | Enable
146 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
type [1-2], V Lock | HV Lock
•Query:
LCKMODE?
Returns the Lock To Source Mode and Type in the format
= mode type
SLCKMODE 1 2 (Enable Lock To Source and set Type to HV Lock)
SLCKMODE? (Queries Lock To Source Mode and Type)
i`hme^pb==Ü=
•Description: Sets Lock To Source Horizontal Phase
•Parameters: h - H Phase [ (-Input H Total/2) - (+Input H Total/2) ]
•Query:
LCKPHASE?
Returns the Lock To Source Horizontal Phase in the format
= h
SLCKPHASE 150 (Set Lock To Source H Phase to 150)
SLCKPHASE? (Queries Lock To Source H Phase)
l`kq=ååå
•Description: Adjust LED Wall Output Contrast.
•Parameters: nnn - Output Contrast (0% - 100%)
•Query:
OCNT?
Returns the Output Contrast in the format
= nnn
SOCNT 50 (Adjusts Output Contrast to 50%)
SOCNT? (Queries Output Contrast)
l`opq
•Description: Reset Output Configuration.
•Parameters: None
SOCRST (Reset Output Configuration)
l`p^s
•Description: Save Output Configuration to non-volatile memory.
•Parameters: None
SOCSAV (Save Output Configuration)
Note Command is only applicable when LED Wall Ctrl = Local.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 147
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
ldj=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Set LED Wall Output Gamma.
•Parameters: mode [0-3], Indoor1 | Indoor2 | Outdoor1 | Outdoor2
•Query:
OGM?
Returns the Output Gamma value in the format
= mode
SOGM 1 (Set Output Gamma to Indoor1)
SOGM? (Queries Output Gamma)
le^qs=åååå
•Description: Set Output Horizontal Active. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Horizontal Active: nnnn[ (Actual Output H Active * 2/
10, with absolute minimum value of 150) - +(Actual Output H Active * 6/5, with
absolute maximum of Output H Total - Output H Sync)]
•Query:
OHATV?
Returns the Output Horizontal Active value in the format
= nnnn
SOHATV 1024 (Set Output Horizontal Active to 1024)
SOHATV? (Queries Output Horizontal Active)
lemlp=åååå
•Description: Set Output Horizontal Position. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Horizontal Position: nnnn[(Output H Sync) - +(Output
H Active )]
•Query:
OHPOS?
Returns the Output Horizontal Position value in the format
= nnnn
SOHPOS 296 (Set Output Horizontal Position to 296)
SOHPOS? (Queries Output Horizontal Position)
lepvk`=åååå
•Description: Set Output Horizontal Sync Width. The minimum limit is 4 and
maximum limit is dependent on the output resolution.
Note Command is only applicable when LED Wall Ctrl = Local.
148 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Horizontal Sync Width: nnnn [4 - (Output H Total -
Output H Active - Output Horizontal Front Porch -4)]
•Query:
OHSYNC?
Returns the Output Horizontal Sync Width value in the format
= nnnn
SOHSYNC 120 (Set Output Horizontal Sync Width to 120)
SOHSYNC? (Queries Output Horizontal Sync Width)
leqlq^i=åååå
•Description: Set Output Horizontal Total. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Horizontal Total: nnnn [(Output Hsync + Output
Hactive + (Output Hpos - Output Hsync)) - +(Actual Output H Total * 9/5)]
•Query:
OHTOTAL?
Returns the Output Horizontal Total value in the format
= nnnn
SOHTOTAL 1344 (Set Output Horizontal Total to 1344)
SOHTOTAL? (Queries Output Horizontal Total)
lqmj=íóéÉ=ê~ëíÉê
•Description: Sets Internal Test pattern mode and raster box mode.
•Parameters:
type - Test Pattern type: type[0..10] 0=Off, 1=H Ramp, 2=V Ramp,
3=100% Col Bars, 4=75% Col bars,5=16x16 Grid, 6=32x32 Grid,
7=Burst, 8=50% Gray, 9=Gray Steps 1, 10=Gray Steps 2
rast - Raster Box: rast[0-1] On | Off
•Query:
OTPM?
Returns the Test pattern mode and raster box mode in the format
= type rast
SOTPM 9 0 (Selects Gray Steps 1 test pattern with raster off)
SOTPM? (Query test pattern mode and with raster box mode)
ls^qs=åååå
•Description: Set Output Vertical Active. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Vertical Active: nnnn[ (Actual Output V Active * 2/10,
with absolute minimum value of 150) - +(Actual Output V Active *6/5, with
absolute maximum value of Output V Total - Output V Sync)]
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 149
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
OVATV?
Returns the Output Vertical Active value in the format
= nnnn
SOVATV 768 (Set Output Vertical Active to 768)
SOVATV? (Queries Output Vertical Active)
lsmlp=åååå
•Description: Set Output Vertical Position. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Vertical Position: nnnn[ (Output V Sync) - +(Output V
Active)]
•Query:
OVPOS?
Returns the Output Vertical Position value in the format
= nnnn
SOVPOS 35 (Set Output Vertical Position to 35)
SOVPOS? (Queries Output Vertical Position)
lspvk`=åååå
•Description: Set Output Vertical Sync Width. The minimum limit is 2 and
maximum limit is dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Vertical Sync Width: nnnn[2-(Output V Total -Output
V Active - Output Vertical Front Porch -2)]
•Query:
OVSYNC?
Returns the Output Vertical Sync Width value in the format
= nnnn
SOVSYNC 6 (Set Output Vertical Sync Width to 6)
SOVSYNC? (Queries Output Vertical Sync Width)
lsqlq^i=åååå
•Description: Set Output Vertical Active. The minimum and maximum limit is
dependent on the output resolution.
•Parameters: nnnn - Output Vertical Total: nnnn[ (Output Vsync + Output Vactive
+ (Output Vpos - Output Vsync)) - +(Actual Output V Total * 9/5)]
•Query:
OVTOTAL?
Returns the Output Vertical Total value in the format
= nnnn
SOVTOTAL 806 (Set Output Vertical Total to 806)
150 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
SOVTOTAL? (Queries Output Vertical Total)
bcifpq
•Description: Lists the names of all saved custom formats.
•Parameters: None
•Returns: List the names of saved custom formats, one name per line.
SEFLIST (Lists all saved custom formats.)
bcobp=åå
•Description: Set base resolution for custom formats. All parameters for custom
format will be loaded using the specified resolution.
•Parameters: nn - Resolution (use RESH command for resolution list)
•Query:
EFRES?
Returns the base resolution used for custom formats settings in the format
= nn
SEFRES 1 (Load custom format settings with resolution index 1 values)
SEFRES? (Query the base resolution for custom format settings)
bcobpe
•Description: Query the available resolution list for custom format.
•Parameters: None
•Returns: All available resolutions in the following format:
n : HxV @F (example: 18 : 1024x768 @59.94)
SEFRESH (Query all available resolutions)
bcfkq=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Set custom format to be non-interlaced or interlaced format.
•Parameters: mode - [0 | 1] Non-Interlaced | Interlaced
•Query:
EFINT?
Returns the interlace mode of the custom format in the format
= mode
SEFINT 1 (Set custom format to be interlaced)
SEFINT? (Query the interlace mode for the custom format)
bceqlq^i=åååå
•Description: Set custom format's Horizontal Total value.
•Parameters: nnnn - H Total [640 - +(162000 / H Rate)]
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 151
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Query:
EFHTOTAL?
Returns the custom format's Horizontal Total value in the format
= nnnn
SEFHTOTAL 1344 (Set custom format H Total as 1344)
SEFHTOTAL? (Query the custom format's H Total value)
bce^qs=åååå
•Description: Set custom format's Horizontal Active value.
•Parameters: nnnn - H Active [500 - +(H Total - H Sync - H Front Porch)]
•Query:
EFHATV?
Returns the custom format's Horizontal Active value in the format
= nnnn
SEFHATV 1024 (Set custom format H Active as 1024)
SEFHATV? (Query the custom format's H Active value)
bcecm=åå
•Description: Set custom format's Horizontal Front Porch value.
•Parameters: nn - H Front Porch [4 - +( H Total - H Active - H Sync - 4)]
•Query:
EFHFP?
Returns the custom format's Horizontal Front Porch value in the format
= nn
SEFHFP 5 (Set custom format H Front Porch as 5)
SEFHFP? (Query the custom format's H Front Porch value)
bcepvk`=åå
•Description: Set custom format's Horizontal Sync value.
•Parameters: nn - H Sync [4 - +( H Total - H Active - H Front Porch - 4)]
•Query:
EFHSYNC?
Returns the custom format's Horizontal Sync value in the format
= nn
SEFHSYNC 5 (Set custom format H Sync as 5)
SEFHSYNC? (Query the custom format's H Sync value)
bceo^qb\
•Description: Query custom format's Horizontal Rate value (kHz).
152 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Parameters: None
•Returns: nn.nn - H Rate
SEFHRATE? (Query custom format's H Rate value)
bcsqlq^i=åååå
•Description: Set custom format's Vertical Total value.
•Parameters: nnnn - V Total [480 - 4096]
•Query:
EFVTOTAL?
Returns the custom format's Vertical Total value in the format
= nnnn
SEFVTOTAL 512 (Set custom format V Total as 512)
SEFVTOTAL? (Query the custom format's V Total value)
bcs^qs=åååå
•Description: Set custom format's Vertical Active value.
•Parameters: nnnn - V Active [400 - +( V Total - V Sync - V Front Porch)]
•Query:
EFVATV?
Returns the custom format's Vertical Active value in the format
= nnnn
SEFVATV 768 (Set custom format V Active as 768)
SEFVATV? (Query the custom format's V Active value)
bcscm=åå
•Description: Set custom format's Vertical Front Porch value.
•Parameters: nn - V Front Porch [1 - +( V Total - V Active - V Sync - 1)]
•Query:
EFVFP?
Returns the custom format's Vertical Front Porch value in the format
= nn
SEFVFP 5 (Set custom format V Front Porch as 5)
SEFVFP? (Query the custom format's V Front Porch value)
bcspvk`=åå
•Description: Set custom format's Vertical Sync value.
•Parameters: nn - V Sync [1 - +( V Total - V Active - V Front Porch - 1)]
•Query:
EFVSYNC?
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 153
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
Returns the custom format's Vertical Sync value in the format
= nn
SEFVSYNC 2 (Set custom format V Sync as 2)
SEFVSYNC? (Query the custom format's V Sync value)
bcso^qb=åååKå
•Description: Set custom format's Vertical Rate value.
•Parameters: nnn.nn - V Rate [20.00 - 120.00]
•Query:
EFVRATE?
Returns the custom format's Vertical Rate value in the format
= nnn.n
SEFVRATE 59.94 (Set custom format V Rate as 59.94)
SEFVRATE? (Query the custom format's V Rate value)
bcp^s
•Description: Saves currently defined custom format to non-volatile memory.
•Parameters: filename - name given to custom format when it is stored. This
filename is translated to all upper case characters. If same custom format name
exist, it will be overwritten.
SEFSAV format1 (saves custom format as FORMAT1.)
bcabi
•Description: Deletes saved custom format. This filename is translated to all
upper case characters
•Parameters: filename - name of custom format to be deleted (translated to upper
case).
SEFDEL FORMAT1 (Deletes custom format with the name "FORMAT1".)
ajpd=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Sets Debug message display mode.
•Parameters: mode - DMSG mode [0-1] Off | On
•Query:
DMSG?
Returns the Debug message display mode in the format
= mode
SDMSG 1 (Sets Debug message mode to On)
SDMSG? (Queries the DMSG mode)
bkbqj
•Description: Set Ethernet Mode
154 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Usage: ENETM mode [0|1] Off|On
bae`m
•Description: Sets DHCP mode.
•Parameters: mode - DHCP mode [0-1] Off | On
•Query:
EDHCP?
Returns the DHCP mode in the format
= mode
SEDHCP 1 (Sets DHCP mode to On)
SEDHCP? (Queries the DHCP mode)
bb`el=ãçÇÉ
•Description: Disable/Enable echo on telnet window (for Microsoft Windows XP
telnet window, echo must be disabled.)
•Parameters: mode - Disable/Enable telnet echo (0 / 1)
SEECHO 0 (Disable echo on telnet window)
bfm=ñññKñññKñññKñññ==óóóKóóóKóóóKóóó=òòòKòòòKòòòKòòò
•Description: Set static IP address, subnet mask and default Gateway IP
•Parameters:
IP address - xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx: [0-255])
Subnet mask - yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy (yyy: [0-255])
Gateway IP - zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz (zzz: [0-255])
•Query:
EIP?
Returns the Ethernet IP address, Subnet mask and Gateway IP in the format
= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz
SEIP 192.168.000.200 255.255.255.000 192.168.000.001 (Sets IP address to
192.168.0.200, subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and default Gateway IP to
192.168.0.1)
SEIP? (Returns IP address, subnet mask and Gateway IP)
bj^`\
•Description: Query Ethernet MAC address for the LED-PRO. Note that each
LED-PRO unit will have a different MAC address.
•Parameters: None
Note If DHCP is used, Subnet mask and Gateway IP is not used by
the LED-PRO.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 155
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Returns: MAC address. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
SEMAC? (Queries for Ethernet MAC address)
p_^ra=å
•Description: Adjust the Serial Baud Rate.
•Parameters: n - Serial baud rate: n[0-4] 1200 | 2400 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400
•Query:
SBAUD?
Returns the Serial Baud Rate in the format
= n
SSBAUD 0 (Adjusts Serial Baud Rate to 1200)
SSBAUD? (Queries Serial Baud Rate.)
pvp^s
•Description: Saves the System State into non-volatile memory
•Parameters: None
SSYSAV (Saves System State.)
ebim=xçéz
•Description: Displays Command List
•Parameters: op[A..Z] optional command
SHelp (Displays command list)
SHelp Freez (Displays syntax/parameters for the Freeze command)
il^ao
•Description: Places unit into loader mode. This mode is used to perform field
upgrades
•Parameters: None.
SLOADR (Puts unit into loader mode.)
obpbq
•Description: Factory resets the system and sets all settings to factory defaults.
•Parameters: None
SRESET (Factory reset the LED-PRO™)
t^iipq^ka_v
•Description: Set LED Wall to standby mode
•Usage: WALLSTANDBY [0|1] (0 = enable, 1 = standby)
156 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
jfkjlab
•Description: Set Minimum Delay Mode
•Usage: MINMODE mode [0|1] disable|enable
jfkpq^q
•Description: Query Minimum Delay Status
•Usage: MINSTAT mode [0|1] disable|enable
il`hlrq
•Description: Locks and unlocks the front panel
•Usage: LOCKOUT (0 = off, 1 = on)
ildla
•Description: Delete Logo image from non-volatile memory. Selecting Black/
Logo channel will now display black.
•Parameters: None
SLOGOD (Delete saved Logo image.)
ildli
•Description: Load current output image from non-volatile memory as Logo
image.
•Parameters: None
SLOGOL (Load current output image as Logo image.)
ildlp
•Description: Save current output image in non-volatile memory as Logo image.
•Parameters: None
SLOGOS (Save current output image as Logo image.)
ildlf
•Description: Query the stored Logo image resolution.
•Parameters: None
SLOGOI (Query Logo resolution.)
qok=íóéÉ=å
•Description: Selects transition type when switching between input channels.
Transition delay is only applicable if the transition type selected is Fade to black /
Fade to logo. Fade to logo transition type only selectable if Logo has been stored
in non-volatile memory.
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 157
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
•Parameters:
type - Transition type [0-2] 0= Fade to black, 1=Freeze image and Cut,
2= Fade to logo
in - Transition delay (in seconds) [1.0s - 5.0s]
•Query:
TRN?
Returns the current transition type and transition delay in the format
= type in
STRN 1 2.0 (Selects fade to black transition in 2 seconds.)
STRN? (Queries transition type and transition delay.)
m^ke=åååKå
•Description: Set Output Horizontal Pan.
•Parameters: nnn.n - Horizontal Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
•Query:
PANH?
Returns the Output Horizontal Pan value in the format
= nnn.n
SPANH 50 (Set Output Horizontal Pan to 50%)
SPANH? (Queries Output Horizontal Pan)
m^ks=åååKå
•Description: Set Output Vertical Pan.
•Parameters: nnn.n - Vertical Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
•Query:
PANV?
Returns the Output Vertical Pan value in the format
= nnn.n
SPANV 50 (Set Output Vertical Pan to 50%)
SPANV? (Queries Output Vertical Pan)
sfbt\=åå
•Description: Query saved View settings (i.e. Zoom setting, Pan H setting, Pan V
setting)
•Parameters: nn - View Index [1 - 15]
•Returns:
nnn.n - Zoom value [min-max] depends on scale factor
hhh.h - Horizontal Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
158 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
vvv.v - Vertical Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
sfbta=åå
•Description: Delete saved View (Preset)
•Parameters: nn - View Index [1 - 15]
SVIEWD 1 (Delete View 1.)
sfbto=åå
•Description: Recall View (Preset)
•Parameters: nn - View Index [0 - 15]. Index 0 is default view (i.e. Zoom = 100%,
Pan H = 0%, Pan V = 0%)
SVIEWR 1 (Recall saved View 1.)
sfbtp=åå
•Description: Save current View (Preset) to non-volatile memory
•Parameters: nn - View Index [1 - 15]
SVIEWS 1 (Save current View to Index 1.)
sfbtf\=áå
•Description: Query saved Input channel View (Preset) settings (i.e. Zoom
setting, Pan H setting, Pan V setting)
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
•Returns:
nnn.n - Zoom value [min-max] depends on scale factor
hhh.h - Horizontal Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
vvv.v - Vertical Pan (-100.0% - +100.0%)
SVIEW? 1 (Query View settings for channel 1.)
sfbtfo
•Description: Recall currently routed Input channel's View (Preset)
•Parameters: None
SVIEWR (Recall saved Input channel View for currently routed channel.)
sfbtfp=áå
•Description: Save current View (Preset) to non-volatile memory for selected
Input channel.
•Parameters: in - Input chnl [1-4]
SVIEWIS 1 (Save current View for channel 1.)
Note A “View” is synonymous with “Preset.”
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 159
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
wllj=åååKå
•Description: Selects zoom scale factor (applied both horizontally and vertically.
•Parameters: nnn.n - Zoom value [min-max] depends on scale factor
•Query:
ZOOM?
Returns the current zoom scale factor in the format
= nnn.n
SZOOM 200.0 (Zoom into the image using a 200.0% scale factor)
SZOOM? (Queries current zoom scale factor.)
160 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
_K==oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=mêçíçÅçä
LED-PRO Remote Commands
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 161
`K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:
•Warranty
•Return Material Authorization (RMA)
•Contact Information
t~êê~åíó
All video products are designed and tested to the highest quality standards and are backed
by a full 3-year parts and labor warranty. Warranties are effective upon delivery date to
customer and are non-transferable. Barco warranties are only valid to the original
purchaser/owner. Warranty related repairs include parts and labor, but do not include faults
resulting from user negligence, special modifications, lightning strikes, abuse (drop/crush),
and/or other unusual damages.
The customer shall pay shipping charges when unit is returned for repair. Barco will cover
shipping charges for return shipments to customers.
oÉíìêå=j~íÉêá~ä=^ìíÜçêáò~íáçå=Eoj^F
In the unlikely event that a product is required to return for repair, please call the following
number and ask for a Sales Engineer to receive a Return Merchandise Authorization
number (RMA).
•(888) 414-7226
RMA Conditions are listed below:
a. Prior to returning any item, you must receive a Return Merchandise
Authorization (RMA) number.
b. All RMA numbers must appear on their return-shipping label.
c. RMA numbers are valid for ten (10) days from issue date.
d. All shipping and insurance charges on all RMAs must be prepaid by the
customer
162 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
`K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
Contact Information
`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
Barco Media and Entertainment
11101 Trade Center Drive
Rancho Cordova, California 95670
USA
•Phone: (916) 859-2500
•Fax: (916) 859-2515
•Websites:
~www.folsom.com
~www.events.barco.com
Sales Contact Information
•Direct: (916) 859-2505
•Toll Free: (888) 414-7226
•E-mail: folsomsales@barco.com
Barco N.V.
Noordlaan 5
8520 Kuurne
BELGIUM
•Phone: +32 56.36.82.11
•Fax: +32 56.35.16.51
•Website: www.barco.com
Technical Support Information
•Tech Line: (866) 374-7878 — 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
•E-mail: folsomsupport@barco.com
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 163
fåÇÉñ
kìãÉêáÅë
10/100BaseT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1-1 sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
1-1 Timing Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
50/60 Hz refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
^
About LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
AC
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Access, status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
ACQ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Acrobat usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Adapter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Address, company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
ADJUST
knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11
using knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
AEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Agency specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Alignment
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
DVI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Ambient Environment Controller . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Analog
15-pin D connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . .121
source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
source alignment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Analog source
blue brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
blue contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
clip to subblk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
green brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
green contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
luma tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
red brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
red contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Application questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Asterisks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Athena scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Auto Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Auto-acquire
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Automatic input acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
_
Barco
company address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
events, contact information . . . . . . . . . . .162
sales contact information . . . . . . . . . . . .162
technical support information . . . . . . . . .162
warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
rate, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Best guess, auto-acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Black, internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Blue
brightness, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . .44
contrast, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Boost mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Bootup
Ethernet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
with stored LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Bottom Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Brightness
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
DVI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
164 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Index
`
Cable information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Capture logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Change
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
sampling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Clip to SubBlk
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Colorspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Commands, remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Communications specifications . . . . . . . . . . .120
Company address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Config
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Connectivity, system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Connector
AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
analog 15-pin D pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
DVI-I pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ethernet pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
LED interface (output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
SDI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
serial pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
universal input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
universal input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
universal input 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connectors
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Contrast
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
DVI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Control
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Creative mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Current input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Custom
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
format, remote commands . . . . . . . . . . .132
format, save as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
in format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
input formats menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
a
Default
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
serial parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
DeIntlc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Delay, minimum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Delete
config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
custom format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
format menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
preset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Description
expert mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
input position menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
LED menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
pan & zoom menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
serial commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
test pattern menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Diagnostic
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
port, default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
port, set parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
port, upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
RS232 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
RS232 menu, software upgrade . . . . . . . 115
Diagonal motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Diagram
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
system connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
DINT in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Director Toolset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 56
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 165
Index
DMSG mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Documentation conventions and symbols . . . . .3
Double arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Download software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
serial upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
via FTP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
via web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
DVI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
DVI source
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
alignment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
DVI-I connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
b
EDHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
EDID DVI
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DVI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
input format menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
EDID In Frmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Edit cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
EECHO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
EFDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
related remote commands . . . . . . . . . . .134
EFHATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
EFHFP nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
EFHRATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
EFHSYNC nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
EFHTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
EFINT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
EFLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
EFRES nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
EFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
EFSAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
EFVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
EFVFP nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
EFVRATE nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
EFVSYNC nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
EFVTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
EIP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
EMAC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Enable/disable
raster box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Enabled, LED wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
ENETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Equipment marking terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 51
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
c
Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 92
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Features
LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
what’s new in version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Fiber
rx ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
tx ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Fiberlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Firmware files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Flash Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 114
Format
custom input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
FREEZ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Front panel
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
display section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
inputs section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
lock/unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
menu keys section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
FTP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Function, quick reference table . . . . . . . . . . . .33
d
Gamma, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
Global preset
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
166 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Index
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Green
brightness, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . .44
contrast, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Guarantee and compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
e
H Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 75
H Front Porch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
H Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
H Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 81, 106
H Rate (KHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
H Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 106
H Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 81
H Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 75, 81
Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Hardware
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
requirements, upgrading software . . . . . 112
History, change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
How to
change input video format . . . . . . . . . . . .69
change sampling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
communicate via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . .91
delete custom input format . . . . . . . . . . . .74
delete global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
delete input configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
install LED-PRO power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
install signals to/from LED-PRO . . . . . . . .21
perform factory reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
power up LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
program EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
recall global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
save custom input format . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
save global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
save input configuration . . . . . . . . . .64, 107
save system state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
set RS-232 connector baud rate . . . . . . .51
set subnet mask, gateway, static IP . . . . .90
unlock front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
upgrade LED-PRO software . . . . . . . . . . 114
use menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
use setup wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Hue, SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
f
IAR in n cn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
IAUTOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
IBRT in nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
ICDEL filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ICLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
ICLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ICNT in nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
ICPHO in nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
ICREC in filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ICRST in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ICSAV in filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ICSP in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
ICUSE in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
ID
fiber rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
fiber tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
LED wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
IEDGE in edge nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
IGM in n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
IHATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
IHPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
IHTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
IHUE in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
ILB in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
ILUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
In Auto Acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Information
cables and adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 101
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Input
aspect ratio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
position menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
position menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .106
position menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
SD/HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 15
Input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 15
Input 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 16
INPUT POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 105
Input Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 42, 62
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 167
Index
Inputs section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 13
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Installation
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
unpacking and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Interlaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Internal black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Introduction to LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Invalid Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
IRBRT in c nn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
IRCNT in c nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
ISAT in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
ISHRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
ISMP in n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
ISYNC in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
ISYNCSLICE in nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
ITYPE in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
IVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
IVPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
IVREC in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
IVSAV in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
IVTOTAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
i
LCK? in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
LCKMODE mode type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
LCKPHASE h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
boost mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
creative mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 101
information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 98
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
OSD status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
OSD type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
reset config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
save config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
source, test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
status, enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
status, standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
test pattern type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
tile count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
tile mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
wall ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
LED-PRO
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
control overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
hardware orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
introduction to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
rear panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
remote control protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
serial command descriptions . . . . . . . . .135
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
upgrading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Left Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Letterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Line voltage selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
LOADR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Local preset, input specific . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 97
Lock
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
to Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
to source menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
to source mode, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
LOCKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 13, 86
about the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Logo
capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
168 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Index
LOGOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
LOGOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
LOGOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
LOGOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Luma Tracking
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
j
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Menu
1-1 timing adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
analog source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
custom input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
delete format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
delete preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
diagnostic RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 115
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DVI source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
EDID DVI input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
expert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
factory reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
global preset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
input aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
input position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
keys section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 12
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 98
LED information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
LED output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
lock to source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
output timing adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
oversample timing adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
overwrite custom format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
recall preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
RS232, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
rules and conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
save preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
SDI source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
tree, simplified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
usage, rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
using the status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Menu tree
expert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
input position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Minimum delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
MINMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
MINSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
MiPIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 56
MiSPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 56
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Motion, diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
k
Navigation cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 31
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
NTSC, PAL or SECAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
l
OCNT nnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
OCRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
OCSAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
OGM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
OHATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
OHPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
OHSYNC nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
OHTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
OLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 56
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Operation, LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Operators safety summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Orientation, hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
OSD
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
OSD, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
OTPM type raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
raster box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
timing adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
OVATV nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Oversample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
timing adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 169
Index
Overview, control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Overwrite Custom Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . .74
OVPOS nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
OVSYNC nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
OVTOTAL nnnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
m
PAN & ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Pan & Zoom
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Pan H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Pan V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Pan/zoom/view remote commands . . . . . . . .134
PANH nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
PANV nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
PCOMP in mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
PDF file usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
analog 15-pin D connector . . . . . . . . . . .121
DVI-I connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Ethernet connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
serial and diagnostci connector . . . . . . .124
Power
cord, line voltage selection . . . . . . . . . . . .20
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
up and initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Preset
global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
local, input specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
recall local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
recall, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
reset local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
reset, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
save local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
save, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Protocol, remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Pulldown Comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
n
Quick function reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
o
Rack mount installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Raster box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Rear panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Recall
config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 109
global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
local preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
preset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
preset, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Red
brightness, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . .44
contrast, analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Reference, quick function table . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 81
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
commands, LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
control protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Remote commands
custom format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
effects related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
LED-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
pan/zoom/view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
system and Etherent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Reset
config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 84, 108
config, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
local preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
preset, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
RS-232 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
170 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Index
RESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
RESI nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Resolution remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Return material authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
Right Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
RS-232
command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
menu, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
port, default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
RTE in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
p
Safety
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sales contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Sample Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
oversample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Saturation, SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Save
as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 84, 107
config, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
global preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
local preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
preset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
preset, pan & zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
system state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 92
SBAUD n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
SD/HD input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
SD/HD SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 16
SDI
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
source alignment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
SDI source
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
clip to subblk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
EDID DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
luma tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 32
Serial
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
port baud rate, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
upgrade procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Set Static IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Setup menu
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 42, 56
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Sharpness
analog source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DVI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SDI source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Signal
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Software
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
requirements, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
upgrade overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
version menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Source
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
LED test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Source alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
agency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
user control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Standard bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Static IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Status
current input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 100
LED OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
LED wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
lock to source mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Status menu
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
LED-PRO • User’s Guide 171
Index
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Support, technical information . . . . . . . . . . . .162
S-Video (Y/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Sync
sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
slice (mV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
SYSAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
output, LED wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
save state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 92
q
Table, quick function reference . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Technical support information . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 91
Terms, equipment marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
TEST PAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 93
Test pattern
generator, diagonal scrolling . . . . . . . . . . .6
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Tile
count, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
mode, LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Timing
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 81
output raster box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Top Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Trans
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Transition
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
TRN type n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 83
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
LED test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
OSD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
r
Universal
input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 15
input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 15
input 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 16
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Unsaved changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Upgrading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
User control specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Using
ESC button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
expert mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
input position menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
input wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
LED menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
pan & zoom menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
SEL button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 32
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
setup wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
test pattern menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
s
V Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 75
V Front Porch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
V Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 81, 107
V Rate (Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
V Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 107
V Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 81
V Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 75, 81
Version, software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
VFD Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
VIEW? nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
VIEWD nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
VIEWI? in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
VIEWIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
VIEWIS in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
VIEWR nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Views (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
VIEWS nn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
t
Wall status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
WALLSTANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
What’s new in version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Wizard
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 42, 62
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 42, 56
172 LED-PRO • User’s Guide
Index
v
YUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
w
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
ZOOM nnn.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
